Rohde & Schwarz ZNA User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. ZNA
  6. User manual

Rohde & Schwarz ZNA User Manual

Vector network analyzers
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
ZNA
Vector Network Analyzers
User Manual
(;ÜÎÌ2)
1178646202
Version 12

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the ZNA and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz ZNA

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz ZNA

  • Page 1 ® R&S Vector Network Analyzers User Manual (;ÜÎÌ2) 1178646202 Version 12...
  • Page 2 ® This manual describes the following R&S ZNA vector network analyzer models: ● ® R&S ZNA26, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 2 test ports, 3.5 mm (m) connectors, order no. 1332.4500.22 ● ® R&S ZNA26, 10 MHz to 26.5 GHz, 4 test ports, 3.5 mm (m) connectors, order no. 1332.4500.24 ●...
  • Page 3 Includes the contents of the getting started manual. The contents of the user manual are available as help in the R&S ZNA. The help offers quick, context-sensitive access to the complete information for the instrument and its firmware.
  • Page 4 R&S Conventions Used in the Documentation 1.1.4 Instrument Security Procedures Deals with security issues when working with the R&S ZNA in secure areas. It is avail- able for download on the Internet. 1.1.5 Basic Safety Instructions Contains safety instructions, operating conditions and further important information.
  • Page 5 Key and knob names are enclosed by square brackets. This also applies to the virtual keys in the control window of the R&S ZNA. "Graphical user interface ele- All names of graphical user interface elements on the screen, such as ments"...
  • Page 6 Safety Information R&S 2 Safety Information The product documentation helps you use the R&S ZNA safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the printed "Basic Safety Instructions". Keep the product documentation nearby and offer it to other users.
  • Page 7 ® Firmware Version 2.10 R&S 3 Firmware Version 2.10 This document describes version 2.10 of the R&S ZNA firmware. Compared to the pre- vious version 2.01, firmware version 2.10 provides the following changes: New functionality ● New software option R&S ZNA-K61 "True differential measurements" for 4-port instruments: –...
  • Page 8 ● Impedance normalization failed for some special balanced port configurations ● *.calkit files created with R&S ZNA and containing snp data were not compati- ble with R&S ZNB/BT/C/D firmware versions < 3.0 and R&S ZNL/LE firmware ver- sions < 1.30...
  • Page 9 ® Firmware Version 2.10 R&S Firmware version ► To check your R&S ZNA firmware version, select "Help" > "About..." from the main menu. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 10 Do not apply excessive force to the handles. If a handle is ripped off, the falling instrument can cause injury. As the R&S ZNA is very heavy (over 30 kg fully equipped), it must always be carried by two people using both carrying handles to avoid personal injury or damage to the instrument.
  • Page 11 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.2 Positioning the Instrument The network analyzer is designed for use under laboratory conditions, either on a bench top or in a rack. Risk of instrument damage due to inappropriate operating conditions An unsuitable operating site or test setup can damage the instrument and connected devices.
  • Page 12 The feet can break if they are overloaded. The overall load on the folded-out feet must not exceed 500 N. 4.1.4 Operation in a 19" Rack The R&S ZNA can be mounted in 19" racks using the adapter R&S ZZA-KN6 (order number 1332.4498.02). Proceed according to the mounting instructions supplied with the rack adapter.
  • Page 13 Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation Regarding length and quality, the following requirements have to be met for cable that are directly connected to the R&S ZNA: Table 4-1: Cable Requirements Cable Type (Connector) Requirement RF cables (PORT 1, ..., PORT N)
  • Page 14 To guarantee the specified functionality, after turning off the R&S ZNA, you have to wait for at least 10 seconds before turning it on again. This rule applies to both the AC power off and the standby state.
  • Page 15 R&S ZNA can be fully controlled by tapping the touchscreen. 4.1.9.1 Connecting a Monitor A standard monitor can be connected to the DVI-D connector of the R&S ZNA. No extra configuration is required. The R&S ZNA also offers a DisplayPort.
  • Page 16 ® Getting Started R&S Putting the Analyzer into Operation 4.1.9.3 Connecting a Mouse A USB mouse can be connected to any of the USB connectors. After being auto-detec- ted by the operating system, it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even dur- ing measurements.
  • Page 17 4.1.9.6 Connecting a USB Cable for Remote Control The R&S ZNA can also be remote controlled via USB. To prepare for remote control operation, connect a suitable USB cable to the type B "USB Device" port on the rear panel of the instrument. With direct connection to a master device, a connecting cable A-B (plug type A onto plug type B) must be used.
  • Page 18 A software update restores the original shortcut properties. 4.2 Instrument Tour This chapter gives an overview of the control elements and connectors of the R&S ZNA and gives all information that is necessary to put the instrument into opera- tion and connect external devices. 4.2.1 Front Panel The front panel of a R&S ZNA consists of a large-scale capacitive touchscreen and the...
  • Page 19 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour 4.2.1.1 Touchscreen The touchscreen is split into two parts: the application window with diagrams and soft- tools on the left, and the control window with its (virtual) function keys and data entry controls on the right. User interaction is touch-only, i.e. all hardkeys commonly used in Rohde &...
  • Page 20 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Application Window Control Window Function Keys Data Entry Panel Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again when the touchscreen is touched.
  • Page 21 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour The Trace keys give access to all trace settings, to the limit check settings, and to the marker functions including marker search. ● [Meas]: select the measured and displayed quantity. ● [Format]: define how measured data (traces) are presented. ●...
  • Page 22 Multi-color LEDs, indicating various HW and FW states: ● Ext. Ref. Indicates whether an external reference clock is used. – Off: the internal reference clock is used – Green: the R&S ZNA is synchronized to an external reference clock User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 23 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour – Yellow, flashing: the R&S ZNA is configured for external synchronization, but cannot lock on the external reference clock. ● Cal. Indicates the calibration state of the active setup. – Off: none of the traces (in the active setup) has a valid calibration –...
  • Page 24 Use a torque wrench when screwing RF cables on the test port connectors. Direct Generator and Receiver Access Hardware options R&S ZNA<frequency>-B16 "Direct Generator/Receiver Access", provide 3 pairs of SMA connectors for each test port, where <frequency> corresponds to the network analyzer type. For detailed ordering information, refer to the product brochure.
  • Page 25 ® Getting Started R&S Instrument Tour Meas. Receiver Meas Out Ref. Receiver Ref Out PORT Generator Source Out The direct generator/receiver access can be used to insert external components (exter- nal signal separating devices, power amplifiers, extension units etc.) into the signal path.
  • Page 26 Label Description System Drive Removable system drive of the R&S ZNA, containing all software (including the operating system and the VNA application) and data. No other drive is built in. Do not remove the system drive during operation. Option R&S ZNA-B19 provides an additional removable system drive (including operating system and firmware).
  • Page 27 Output: 10 MHz Trigger In A BNC connector for an incoming external trigger signal (LV-TTL 3.3 V, 5 V tolerant). The optional trigger board R&S ZNA-B91 provides three additional trigger inputs (and four trigger outputs). User Port 25-pin D-Sub connector used as an input and output for other control signals (LV-TTL 3.3 V, 5 V tolerant).
  • Page 28 Manual and remote control of the instrument Manual control of the R&S ZNA is possible either via its touchscreen (without using a mouse and/or keyboard), via locally connected monitor + mouse + keyboard (see Chapter 4.1.9, "Connecting External...
  • Page 29 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Using the Touchscreen To access an instrument function: 1. Press a (virtual) key, e.g. the [Meas] key in the Trace section. The corresponding softtool expands at the current docking position. 2. Make sure the "S-Params" radio button is selected. 3.
  • Page 30 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4. Select a control element, e.g. "a1 Src Port 1". The diagram immediately reflects your selection. The active trace shows the mea- surement results for the selected measured quantity. A control element with three dots (e.g. System – [Setup] > "Setup" > "System Con- fig...") opens a dialog, containing a group of related settings, a wizard or additional information.
  • Page 31 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Using the menu bar The menu bar at the bottom of the application screen provides alternative access to all instrument functions. To repeat the measured quantity selection described above, ► Select Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" > "Wave" > "a1 Src Port 1". The diagram immediately reflects your selection.
  • Page 32 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select "a1 Src Port 2". 4.3.2 Control Elements of the Application Window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
  • Page 33 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument These methods are described in more detail in the following sections. For further reference: ● Refer to Chapter 5.2.1, "Display Elements of a Diagram", on page 76 to obtain information about the results in the diagram. ●...
  • Page 34 ● Open the "METAS Reconnection" dialog Open the METAS Reconnection Dialog This button is only visible if, option R&S ZNA-K50 "Measurement Uncertainty Analysis"" is installed. It is only enabled, if a METAS cali- bration is active. ● Open the configuration dialog for non-standard channel modes.
  • Page 35 A short tap (left mouse click) expands a menu or submenu. If a menu com- mand has no submenu assigned, a short tap (left mouse click) opens a dialog or directly activates the menu command. When a (sub)menu is selected, the R&S ZNA displays the corresponding softtool.
  • Page 36 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Overview of menu functions ● The "File" menu provides functions to handle recall sets and trace files, to print or save diagram content, and to shut down the VNA application. ● The "Trace" menu provides all trace settings, the limit check settings, and the marker functions including marker search.
  • Page 37 The "Hard Key" panel is particularly useful if the analyzer is controlled from an external monitor or Remote Desktop. For the R&S ZNA, it is hidden by default. In "Single Window Mode", it is visible (see Chapter 4.3.6.1, "Dual-Window Mode vs. Single-Window Mode",...
  • Page 38 (e.g. "Ch<i>: Avg 9/10"), or "Ch<i>: Avg None" if averaging is disabled ● the progress of the sweep The progress bar also shows when the R&S ZNA prepares a sweep with new channel settings (See Chapter 5.1.4, "Sweep Control",...
  • Page 39 Move two fingers apart on the display (spread) or move two fingers together on the dis- play (pinch). On the R&S ZNA, these gestures take effect for diagrams only. The effect depends on the current zoom mode (see Chapter 4.3.7, "Scaling Diagrams",...
  • Page 40 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Figure 4-8: Pinching While "Zoom Select" is active (toolbar icon or softtool button is toggled on), spread- ing and pinching is disabled. You can only select a rectangular area (using one fin- ger) then. ●...
  • Page 41 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.4 Working with Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way. The settings are visualized, if possible. An example is shown below. All dialogs are operated in a similar way.
  • Page 42 The analyzer displays measurement results as traces in rectangular diagrams. Markers are used to read specific numerical values and to search for points or regions on a trace. The following section presents some of the graphical tools the R&S ZNA pro- vides for trace and marker handling.
  • Page 43 3. In the dialog box that is opened when you release the "New Trace" icon, select the S-parameter to be measured. For a four-port analyzer: The R&S ZNA generates a new trace for the selected S-parameter. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 44 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select Trace – [Meas]. Drag and drop a softkey repre- senting a measured quantity to create a trace. Or simply select another softkey to change the measured quantity of the active trace. Select Trace –...
  • Page 45 4.3.5.4 Using Drag and Drop You can drag and drop many of the R&S ZNA's control and display elements to change their size and position. The drag and drop functionality is often more convenient to use than the equivalent buttons of the softtool panels. The following table gives an over- view.
  • Page 46 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument Screen element Action Drag and drop... Delete Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Deleting Display Elements", on page 45 Trace Create Chapter 4.3.5.1, "Adding New Traces and Diagrams", on page 42 Move vertically Reference line marker (right diagram edge) Move into other or new Trace line diagram...
  • Page 47 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument "Control Window: Data Entry Panel" on page 22. In single-window mode (System – [Display] > "Config" > "Single Window Mode") only the application window is shown, with its virtual Hardkey Panel enabled. The values can be edited in place, either using an external keyboard or by calling the VNA's numeric editor or on-screen keyboard (see Chapter 4.3.6.2, "Using the Numeric Edi-...
  • Page 48 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Use the buttons in the numeric keypad to compose the numeric input value. 3. If desired, select a "Step Size" and use the cursor up/down buttons to increment/ decrement the current value. If a marker is active, you can also set the numeric value to the current marker value ("Set to Marker").
  • Page 49 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument For the following procedure, we assume single-window mode. 1. Activate a character data input field in a softtool or a dialog. 2. Double-tap/click the input field to open the on-screen keyboard. 3. Select character buttons to compose the input string. 4.
  • Page 50 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 2. Select "External Tools" 3. Select "Screen Keyboard". 4.3.7 Scaling Diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range. Choose the method that is most convenient for you. 4.3.7.1 Using the Graphical Zoom The graphical zoom function magnifies a rectangular portion of the diagram (zoom win-...
  • Page 51 "Zoom Config" toolbar icon and select "Mode Stimulus Zoom". Then use the "Zoom Select" icon to narrow the sweep range and adjust the vertical scaling. Refer to the R&S ZNA Help or User Manual for details. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 52 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.7.2 Setting the Sweep Range The sweep range for all related channels is displayed in the channel info area at the bottom of each diagram: To change the sweep range of the active channel, use one of the following methods: ●...
  • Page 53 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument 4.3.7.4 Auto Scale The "Auto Scale" function adjusts the scale divisions and the reference value so that the entire trace fits into the diagram. To access "Auto Scale", use one of the following methods: ●...
  • Page 54 ® Getting Started R&S Operating the Instrument To set the sweep range using markers, use one of the following methods. Set "Start" and "Stop" values in the diagram: 1. Create two normal markers, e.g. the markers "Mkr 1" (default label "M1") and "Mkr 2"...
  • Page 55 Use the context menu of the diagram, the System – [Display] key or the "Display" menu to access the display settings. 4.4 Performing Measurements This chapter takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZNA network analyzer and describes basic operation tasks. Safety considerations...
  • Page 56 To prepare a transmission measurement, you have to connect your DUT (which for simplicity we assume to have appropriate connectors) in-between a pair of analyzer test ports. It is recommended that you preset the R&S ZNA to start from a well-defined instrument state.
  • Page 57 DUT. It is defined as the ratio of the transmitted wave at the DUT's output port (port no. 2) to the incident wave at the DUT's input port (port no. The R&S ZNA automatically adjusts its internal source and receiver to the selected measured quantities: For an S...
  • Page 58 With a single Through, it is possible to perform a transmission normalization, compen- sating for a frequency-dependent attenuation and phase shift in the signal paths. Due to the R&S ZNA's calibration wizard, calibration is a straightforward, guided proc- ess. 1. Replace the DUT by the Through standard of your calibration kit. Make sure to dis- connect all calibration units.
  • Page 59 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements 6. Select "OK" to apply your settings and return to the calibration setup dialog "Cali- bration Setting" wizard. 7. Select the test port connector type and gender (here: N 50 Ω, female, correspond- ing to a male Through standard), and the calibration kit (here: R&S ZV-Z121). 8.
  • Page 60 Through standard. The similarity of real and expected traces indicates that the Through standard has been properly connected. After the R&S ZNA has completed the calibration sweep and calculated the correction data, the "Apply" button is enabled.
  • Page 61 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements 2. Select Trace – [Marker], activate the "Marker Search" softtool tab and activate "Min" search. The marker jumps to the absolute minimum of the curve in the entire sweep range. The marker info field shows the coordinates of the new marker position. 3.
  • Page 62 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements Data transfer is made easier if external accessories are connected to the analyzer or if the instrument is integrated into a LAN. Refer to Chapter 4.1.9, "Connecting External Accessories", on page 15, and Chapter 11.1.3, "Remote Operation in a LAN", on page 1413 to obtain information about the necessary steps.
  • Page 63 ® Getting Started R&S Performing Measurements You can also use the basic transmission test setup, e.g. if you want to measure reflection and transmission parameters in parallel. ● The analyzer provides special calibration types for reflection measurements. Use the calibration wizard and select an appropriate type. A full n-port calibration (TOSM, UOSM, TNA ...) corrects the system errors for all transmission and reflection S-parameters.
  • Page 64 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts 5 Concepts and Features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data. Also included are descriptions of the screen con- tents, possible measured quantities, calibration methods and typical test setups.
  • Page 65 5.1.2 Recall Sets A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. The R&S ZNA can handle multiple recall sets in parallel, each of them displayed in a separate tab. A recall set can be saved to a recall set file (*.znxml|*.znx) and reopened at a later point in time or at another instrument.
  • Page 66 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts 5.1.3.1 Trace Settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...
  • Page 67 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace. If a previ- ously inactive area is selected as the active area, the trace that was active last time when the area was active again becomes the active trace.
  • Page 68 To improve the accuracy, it is possible to insert a delay time before each partial mea- surement. In the default configuration, the R&S ZNA performs a partial measurement at all sweep points (partial sweep) before the hardware settings are changed. The next partial mea- surement is carried out in an additional sweep ("Alternated"...
  • Page 69 For a 2-port R&S ZNA this feature is not available ● For a 4-port R&S ZNA, VNA ports 1 and 2 can measure one DUT, while port 3 and port 4 can measure another one (using the same stimulus settings).
  • Page 70 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Parallel Measurements with Frequency Offset When performing parallel measurements, it is possible to specify a minimum frequency offset between the port groups. This is particularly useful for situations where "Cross- talk" between different DUTs would otherwise make the simultaneous measurement impossible (e.g.
  • Page 71 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts Sweep type [Start](unit) [Stop] (unit) [Center] (unit) [Span] (unit) "Power" "Start Power" (dBm) "Stop Power" (dBm) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Mode" "CW Frequency" (Hz) "Number of Points" (-) "CW Frequency" (Hz) "CW Frequency"...
  • Page 72 The selected sweep range applies to all source and receive ports of the analyzer. In arbitrary mode (with option R&S ZNA-K4), you can define port-specific frequencies and powers; see Chapter 6.12.2.2, "Port Settings Dialog",...
  • Page 73 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts ALC IF IF Filter (analog): Normal IF Filter (analog): Wideband, Narrowband band- (dB) (ms) (ms) (dB) (ms) (ms) width control control 10 kHz 0.66 0.042 0.35 0.025 0.215 100 kHz 0.11 0.0014 0.04 0.315 0.003 0.031...
  • Page 74 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts derived from S-parameters such as impedances, admittances, stability factors) differs from the channel data flow for wave quantities (and derived quantities such as ratios). User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 75 ® Concepts and Features R&S Basic Concepts SYST. ERR. CORR. POWER POWER POWER (FACT) CORR. CORRECTION DATA CORR. DATA SYST. ERR. RATIOS SYSTEM CORR. ERROR CORR. DATA (USER) Channel data flow (for all traces of the channel) OFFSET (ALT. 1) S - parameters Wave quantities, ratios DEEMBEDDING...
  • Page 76 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2 Screen Elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 5.3, "Measurement Results", on page 101.
  • Page 77 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select System – [Display] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
  • Page 78 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements of the triangle can be changed to modify the diagram scale and shift the trace verti- cally. ● Measured quantity (for the active trace): The measured quantity is indicated in the trace list; see "Trace List and Trace Settings"...
  • Page 79 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● The format section shows how the measured data is presented in the graphical display. Use the context menu of the format section to change the format of the related trace. ● The next sections show the value of the vertical or radial diagram divisions ("Scale Div.") and the reference value ("Ref").
  • Page 80 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements 5.2.1.3 Markers Markers are tools for numerical readout of measured data and for selecting points on the trace, or, in general, in the diagram area. A marker is displayed with a symbol (e.g. a triangle, a crossbar or a line) on the trace, which can be a data trace or a memory trace.
  • Page 81 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements If the marker position is adjusted using the roll key, the mouse or the cursor keys, it always remains within the sweep range. If set explicitly by entering a numeric value, the marker position can be outside the sweep range. In this case, the marker symbol is automatically positioned to the start or stop value of the sweep range, whichever is closer.
  • Page 82 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● To change the format of the active marker, select [TRACE] > "Marker" > "Marker Properties" > "Marker Format". ● To express the coordinates of the active marker relative to the reference marker, activate the delta mode [TRACE] >...
  • Page 83 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Marker Format Description Formula Real Real part of z Re(z) = x Imag Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y (Voltage) Standing Wave Ratio SWR = (1 + |z|) / (1 – |z|) dB Mag Phase Magnitude of z in dB and phase in two lines 20 * log|z| dB arctan ( Im(z) /...
  • Page 84 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Marker Coupling It connects the markers of a set of traces. Marker coupling allows you to compare different measurement results (assigned to dif- ferent traces) at the same stimulus value. It connects the markers of a set of traces. Marker coupling can be enabled: ●...
  • Page 85 Bandfilter Search In a bandfilter search, the R&S ZNA locates trace segments with a bandpass or band- stop shape and determines characteristic filter parameters. Bandpass and bandstop regions can be described with the same parameter set: ●...
  • Page 86 The "Channel Name" appears in the first section. The default names for new chan- nels are Ch<n> with an automatically assigned number <n>. If a time domain transform is active, the R&S ZNA displays an additional line to indicate the stimulus range of the displayed time-domain trace.
  • Page 87 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements sweeps) or the CW frequency (for power sweeps), and the measurement band- width ("BW"). ● Stop indicates the highest value of the sweep variable (e.g. the highest frequency measured), corresponding to the right edge of a Cartesian diagram. Open a segment's context menu to access common related tasks.
  • Page 88 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements The functions of the context menu can also be called using the menu bar or the related softtool panels. Use whatever method is most convenient. 5.2.2 Dialogs Dialogs provide groups of related settings and allow to make selections and enter data in an organized way.
  • Page 89 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements In most dialogs, however, it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect. The settings in such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly. The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish: ●...
  • Page 90 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements ● "Look in:" specifies the directory to be listed. The icons to the right of the pull-down list are provided for easy navigation in the file system (place the cursor on the icons to obtain "Whats this" help). ●...
  • Page 91 The buttons in the optional "Setup" part on the right allow you to switch between differ- ent measurement modes. The available measurement modes depend on the available options, e.g. intermodulation measurements require option R&S ZNA-K4 and spectrum measurements require option R&S ZNA-K1.
  • Page 92 5.2.3 Trace Formats A trace format defines how a trace is represented in a diagram. The R&S ZNA supports the following trace formats: ● Cartesian Trace Formats "dB Mag" , "Phase" , "SWR" , "Unwr Phase" , "Lin Mag" , "Log Mag"...
  • Page 93 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Diagram Representation When a Cartesian trace is assigned to a diagram, the stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis (x-axis), the response values appear on the vertical axis (y-axis). Graph Scaling ● Except for the "Log Mag" format, the y-axis scale is always linear. ●...
  • Page 94 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Trace Format Description Formula "Lin Mag" Magnitude of z, unconverted |z| = sqrt ( x "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "Delay" Group delay, neg. derivative of the –...
  • Page 95 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Example: Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S etc.), then the cen- ter of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z at the input test port of the DUT (no reflection, matched input).
  • Page 96 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal resistance R and reactance X: ● Points with the same resistance are located on circles. ● Points with the same reactance produce arcs. The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex impedance Z = R + j X and the equivalent inductance L.
  • Page 97 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Example: Reflection coefficients in the Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the unit Smith chart can be used to read the normalized impedance of the DUT. The coor- dinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) impedances): = (1 + Γ) / (1 –...
  • Page 98 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Inv Smith For "Inv Smith" formatted traces, the response values are interpreted as complex reflection coefficients S and represented in terms of their corresponding complex admittance Y(S ) = G(S ) + j B(S In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith"...
  • Page 99 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements The basic properties of the inverted Smith chart follow from this construction: ● The central horizontal axis corresponds to zero susceptance (real admittance). The center of the diagram represents Y/Y = 1, where Y is the reference admittance of the system (zero reflection).
  • Page 100 ® Concepts and Features R&S Screen Elements Examples for special points in the inverted Smith chart: ● The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of a short circuit (Y = infinity, U = 0) is one, its phase is –180 deg. ●...
  • Page 101 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Complex dimensionless quan- Complex quantities with dimensions: Real quantities: tities: Wave quantities, Z-parameters, Y- S-parameters and ratios parameters, impedances, admittan- Smith ON (reflection coefficients S – – Polar – – Inverted Smith ON (reflection coefficients S –...
  • Page 102 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results                     Meaning of 2-port S-parameters The four 2-port S-parameters can be interpreted as follows: ●...
  • Page 103 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The indices of the S-parameters described so far number the output and input ports of a DUT; the parameters are referred to as single-ended S-parameters. The S-parameter description can also be used to differentiate between different propagation modes of the waves at the output and input ports.
  • Page 104 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results High Signal Power When dealing with external signal amplification, make sure that: ● the signals fed to the analyzer are within the allowed range ● during calibration the calibration standards meet the requirements in terms of their power handling capacity Attenuator pads can be used to adapt the power levels.
  • Page 105 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results The renormalized wave quantities (a and b ) and the S-matrix S can be calculated from S and the reference impedances Z according to two alternative waveguide circuit theories. 1. Traveling waves In the model of Marks and Williams ("A General Waveguide Circuit Theory"), the wave quantities a and b are transformed as follows: ...
  • Page 106 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results 5.3.3 Impedance Parameters An impedance is the complex ratio between a voltage and a current. The analyzer pro- vides two independent sets of impedance parameters: ● Converted impedances (each impedance parameter is obtained from a single S- parameter) ●...
  • Page 107 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Table 5-4: Calculation of Converted Reflection Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Series Transmission Impedance A two-port transmission parameter Z (i ≠ j) can describe a pure serial impedance between the two ports. The calculation formula of a converted serial transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which Reference Impedances...
  • Page 108 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Table 5-6: Calculation of Converted Parallel Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves 5.3.3.2 Z-Parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (impe- dance = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e.
  • Page 109 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results 5.3.4 Admittance Parameters An admittance is the complex ratio between a current and a voltage. The analyzer pro- vides two independent sets of admittance parameters: ● Converted admittances (each admittance parameter is obtained from a single S- parameter) ●...
  • Page 110 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Y-parameters can be easily extended to describe circuits with more than two ports or several modes of propagation. 5.3.5 Wave Quantities and Ratios The elements of the S-, Z- and Y-matrices represent fixed ratios of complex wave amplitudes.
  • Page 111 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results is detected at the measurement receiver of the VNA port connected to DUT port In a standard forward S-parameter measurement, a Src Port 1 is the incident wave and b Src Port 1 is the reflected wave at DUT port 1. 5.3.5.2 Ratios A ratio measurement provides the complex ratio of any combination of transmitted or...
  • Page 112 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Figure 5-6: More Wave Quantities dialog The following detectors are available: ● "Normal" selects the default detector mode where each valid measurement point is displayed without modification. The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point.
  • Page 113 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results Combining different detectors The detector setting in the More Ratios menu applies to both the numerator and the denominator wave quantity. To allow for different detector settings, measure the numer- ator and denominator wave quantities individually and use trace functions to calculate the ratio.
  • Page 114 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results ● The measurement is not impaired by the non-ideal characteristics of the balun (e.g. error tolerances, limited frequency range). ● Calibration can be performed at the DUT's ports. If necessary (e.g. to compensate for the effect of a test fixture), it is possible to shift the calibration plane using length offset parameters.
  • Page 115 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results ence impedances for the differential and common mode at each balanced port. Both steps can be done in a single "Balanced Ports" dialog. Depending on the test setup, the analyzer provides different types of mixed mode parameters;...
  • Page 116 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results If <mout> is different from <min>, the S-parameters are called mode conversion fac- tors. Mixed Mode Parameters for Different Test Setups Which types of mixed mode parameter are available depends on the measured device and the port configuration of the analyzer.
  • Page 117 CMRR between two ports (at least one of them balanced) is given below. Imbalance and common-mode rejection ratio measurements can only be measured on a 4-port R&S ZNA. General Definition In general, imbalance and CMRR are quantities with two numeric indices, indicating...
  • Page 118 ® Concepts and Features R&S Measurement Results 5.3.7 Stability Factors The stability factors K, μ1 and μ2 are real functions of the (complex) S-parameters, defined as follows:              ...
  • Page 119 (ε > 1 for all dielectrics and ε = 1 for the vacuum). 5.4 Operations on Traces The R&S ZNA can perform more complex operations on the measured traces. Some of the operations, e.g. the time domain transform, require additional software options; see Chapter 5.7, "Optional Extensions and Accessories",...
  • Page 120 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces A limit check consists of comparing the measurement results to the limit lines and dis- play a pass/fail indication. An acoustic warning and a TTL signal at the User Port on the rear panel (for test automation) can be generated in addition if a limit is violated. Upper and lower limit lines are both defined as a combination of segments with a linear or logarithmic dependence between the measured quantity and the sweep variable (stimulus variable).
  • Page 121 While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized. To facilitate the interpretation, the R&S ZNA displays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion (the "tighter" limit line at each point).
  • Page 122 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces 5.4.1.2 Rules for Ripple Test Definition The analyzer places few restrictions on the definition of ripple limit ranges. The following rules ensure a maximum of flexibility: ● Ranges do not have to be sorted in ascending or descending order (e.g. the "Start Stimulus"...
  • Page 123 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 120). 5.4.1.3 Circle Limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi- nate in the diagram and its radius.
  • Page 124 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces ● With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smith diagram (Z = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the impedance (Im(Z), reactance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 125 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 126 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces 5.4.1.4 File Format for Limit Lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...
  • Page 127 5.4.2 Trace Files The R&S ZNA can store one or several data or memory traces to a file or load a mem- ory trace from a file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. The analyzer provides several types of trace files: ●...
  • Page 128 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces ● ASCII ("*.csv") files ● Matlab ("*.dat") files are ASCII files which can be imported and processed in Mat- lab. The trace file formats complement each other; see Chapter 5.4.2.3, "Finding the Best File Format", on page 132.
  • Page 129 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces mat> = RI) the trace data for each stimulus frequency is arranged as indicated in the lowermost comment lines during export: 1-port files (*.s1p) ! freq[Hz] re:S11 im:S11 can be replaced by an any S-parameter, so the *.s1p format is suitable for export- ing an arbitrary data trace representing an S-parameter.
  • Page 130 ® Concepts and Features R&S Operations on Traces Touchstone files are normally intended for a complete set of <n>-port S-parame- ters. The only exceptions are one-port Touchstone files that can be created using an arbitrary trace. This type of export can be accessed using either the GUI func- tion TRACE –...
  • Page 131 Operations on Traces Note that when reimporting this type of file into standard applications (including the R&S ZNA itself), the reference resistance from the Touchstone option line is used and the impedance system underlying the data is not interpreted correctly.
  • Page 132 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration formats lin. Mag-Phase or dB Mag-Phase. The data format for export files can be selected in the Export Data dialog. The trace data is arranged as described in the header. Different values are separated by semicolons, commas or other characters, depending on the selected "Decimal Sep- arator"...
  • Page 133 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 2. The analyzer compares the measurement data of the standards with their known, ideal response. The difference is used to calculate the system errors using a partic- ular error model (calibration type) and derive a set of system error correction data. 3.
  • Page 134 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration and port de-/activation The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 135 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Open, Match (at Reflection tracking, High Reflection and both ports), transmission mea- (n-port) Source match, surements. Through (between Directivity, all port pairs) Load match, Transmission track- Short, Match (at Reflection tracking, High...
  • Page 136 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.1.1 Normalization (Refl Norm..., Trans Norm...) A normalization is the simplest calibration type since it requires the measurement of only one standard for each calibrated S-parameter: ● One-port (reflection) S-parameters (S , ...) are calibrated with an Open or a Short standard providing the reflection tracking error term.
  • Page 137 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration This calibration type requires a Short, an Open and a Match standard to be connected to a single test port plus a Through standard between this calibrated source port and the other load ports. The four standard measurements are used to derive the following error terms: ●...
  • Page 138 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration total number of standard measurements for an n-port TOSM calibration is 3n + n (n-1) = n (n+2). However, this number can be significantly decreased without losing too much precision (see Chapter 5.5.1.11, "Full n-Port Calibration with Reduced Number of Through Connections", on page 143)
  • Page 139 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Adapter Removal is an extension of the 2-port UOSM calibration. It requires two addi- tional reflection OSM calibrations with the adapter successively connected to port 1 and port 2. Figure 5-7: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients.
  • Page 140 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results. ● Adapter Removal is not defined for more than 2 ports. However, with "Multiple Cali- brations per Channel"...
  • Page 141 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration TRL calibration is especially useful for DUTs in planar line technology (e.g. test fixtures, on-wafer measurements) where it is difficult to design and connect accurately modeled Open, Short or Match standards. If TRL is not practicable, TNA may be an alternative. TRL with several lines and with TRM The system of equations solved to derive the error terms is such that singularities occur whenever the length difference ΔL between the Through and the Line is an inte-...
  • Page 142 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Example: TRL calibration with two and three Lines If several Lines with different lengths are measured, the analyzer automatically divides the calibrated range into segments. The calibration data of the longest line is applied to the lowest segment, the calibration data of the shortest line to the highest segment.
  • Page 143 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration /[18*(l – l long where l denotes the electrical length of the longest of the used Line standards, l long the length of the Through. The analyzer assumes l << l and calculates f long (18*l ).
  • Page 144 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration [For the mathematically inclined: the graph constructed from the calibration ports as nodes and the measured Throughs as edges must be connected.] Compared to the full number of n(n-1)/2 Through connections, the time and effort is significantly reduced, in particular if n is large.
  • Page 145 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.2 Calibration Standards and Calibration Kits A calibration kit is a set of physical calibration standards for a particular connector type. The magnitude and phase response of the calibration standards (i.e. their S-parame- ters) must be known or predictable within a given frequency range. The standards are grouped into several types (Open, Through, Match,...) correspond- ing to the different input quantities for the analyzer's error models.
  • Page 146 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Standard Type Characteristics Ideal Standard Offset Model Load Model Attenuation Fully matched standard in both directions (two- – – – port; the reflection factor at both ports is zero) ☑ ☑ Symm. network Unknown mismatched reflection-symmetric stan- –...
  • Page 147 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration The impedance for waveguides is frequency-dependent. If a waveguide line type is selected in the "Cal Connector Types" dialog, the "Char. Imp." field is disabled and indi- cates "varies"instead of a definite impedance value. Moreover no loss or offset loss can be set.
  • Page 148 The precision of the calibration kit parameters determines the accuracy of the system error correction and of the measurements. The R&S ZNA displays a warning if you use a typical or ideal parameter set to calibrate a channel.
  • Page 149 Sliding Match have been measured. However, it is often desir- able to acquire calibration data from both standards. The R&S ZNA can acquire correction data for up to 20 positions. The analyzer combines the data in an appropriate manner: ●...
  • Page 150 On loading some older R&S ZVR-specific *.ck files, e.g. the R&S ZV-Z23 cal kit file, the R&S ZNA generates the message "File does not comply with instrument calibration kit file format". The files must be converted using an R&S ZVR network analyzer equip- ped with a firmware version V3.52 or later.
  • Page 151 The calibration "Pool" is a collection of correction data sets (cal groups) that the ana- lyzer stores in a common directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Calibration\Data. Cal groups in the pool can be applied to different channels and recall sets. Each cal group is stored in a separate file named <CalGroup_name>.cal. The cal group name can be changed in the "Calibration Manager"...
  • Page 152 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Advantages of automatic calibration Automatic calibration is faster and more secure than manual calibration, because: ● There is no need to connect several standards manually. The number of connec- tions to be performed quickly increases with the number of ports. ●...
  • Page 153 Safety aspects ● The calibration unit is intended for direct connection to R&S ZNA network ana- lyzers following the procedure described above. You can also connect the unit before switching on the analyzer. Do not connect the unit to other USB hosts, e.g.
  • Page 154 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.5.2 Performing an Automatic Calibration After connection and initialization of the calibration unit, define an automatic calibration in the calibration setup dialog; see Chapter 6.11.1.4, "Calibration Setup Dialog", on page 452), Then perform the automatic calibration of the related test ports using the calibration wizard;...
  • Page 155 (suitable for the cal unit with adapters) may be desirable. The R&S ZNA provides a characterization wizard which you can use to generate your own characterization data sets for (modified) R&S cal units. The characterization data can be stored in the cal unit and used for automatic calibration whenever needed.
  • Page 156 (ordered) pair of test ports requiring a Through mea- surement For Full n-Port calibrations, the R&S ZNA applies the "reduced through" logic to calcu- late the correction terms for those test port pairs that are not covered by a single assignment and hence cannot be measured directly (see Chapter 5.5.1.11, "Full n-Port...
  • Page 157 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Calibration Minimal solution Default solution (minimal) type Full One Port Each calibrated test port must appear in exactly one Subdivide the n test ports into port assignment. groups of m ports with increasing port numbers. Create a separate port assignment for each group.
  • Page 158 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Table 5-12: Full n-port: Line-shaped optimum solution Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 1 Cal Unit Port 2 Cal Unit Port 3 Cal Unit Port 4...
  • Page 159 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration Measurement System error correction Scalar Power calibration SMARTerCal Meas. of wave quantities or Not possible Not necessary ratios on linear DUTs --> Use SMARTerCal Meas. of wave quantities or Not possible ratios on non-linear DUTs -->...
  • Page 160 2. Internal source power flatness calibration: In the following steps, the calibrated reference receiver is used to adjust the source power. To this end, the R&S ZNA performs a series of calibration sweeps at varying source power until the number of "Total Readings"...
  • Page 161 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.6.2 Measurement Receiver Calibration A measurement receiver calibration ensures that the power readings at a specified receive port of the analyzer (b-waves) agree with the source power level calibrated at an arbitrary calibration plane. Typically, the calibration plane is at the input of the receiver so that the calibration eliminates frequency response errors in the calibrated receiver.
  • Page 162 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration 5.5.6.3 Power Calibration Labels Power calibration labels in the trace list for wave quantities and ratios inform you about the status and type of the current scalar power calibration. The labels appear in the fol- lowing instances: ●...
  • Page 163 The known transmission coefficients of the two-port can be entered manually or automatically (Channel – [Cal] > "Pwr Cal Settings" > "Transm. Coeffi- cients..."). The R&S ZNA supports two different test scenarios. A: Two-port at DUT (during measurement) Test and measurement procedure: 1.
  • Page 164 ® Concepts and Features R&S Calibration B: Two-port at power meter (during calibration) Test and measurement procedure: 1. Perform the calibration with the additional two-port between the analyzer port and the power sensor. During the calibration, the analyzer increases the power sensor values by the 2-port transmission coefficients to move the calibration plane of the power calibration towards the input of the DUT.
  • Page 165 The R&S ZNA also supports a SMARTerCal based on the calibration units. The cali- bration units provide the n-port system error correction data (TOSM or UOSM); a sub- sequent power calibration sweep completes the calibration.
  • Page 166 "SMARTerCal", on page 164, the power meter results of a SMARTerCal are only used to calibrate the receivers of the R&S ZNA. To obtain defi- nite source power levels, you can combine the SMARTerCal with an additional scalar source power calibration.
  • Page 167 (or calibration units). The R&S ZNA offers multiple possibilities to calibrate several channels in parallel: ● The "Calibrate All" function supports parallel calibration of multiple channels. For each channel and port set, a different calibration, and even multiple calibrations can be configured.
  • Page 168 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.1 Offset Parameters Offset parameters compensate for the known length and loss of a (non-dispersive and perfectly matched) transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. The analyzer can also auto-determine length and loss parameters, assuming that the actual values should minimize the group delay and loss across the sweep range.
  • Page 169 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.1.3 Auto Length The "Auto Length" function (Channel – [Offset Embed] > "Offset" > "Auto Length") adds an electrical length offset to a test port with the condition that the residual delay of the active trace (defined as the negative derivative of the phase response) is minimized across the entire sweep range.
  • Page 170 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Preconditions for Auto Length, effect on measured quantities and exceptions "Auto Length" is enabled if the measured quantity contains the necessary phase infor- mation as a function of frequency, and if the interpretation of the results is unambigu- ous: ●...
  • Page 171 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ted admittances or impedances are calculated from the corresponding "Auto Length and Loss" corrected S-parameters. Y-parameters, Z-parameters and stability factors are not derived from a single S-parameter, therefore "Auto Length and Loss" is dis- abled.
  • Page 172 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● "Open and Short" causes the analyzer to calculate the correction data from two subsequent sweeps. The results are averaged to compensate for errors due to non-ideal terminations. Auto Length and Loss vs. Direct Compensation "Auto Length and Loss"...
  • Page 173 5.6.2 Embedding and Deembedding The R&S ZNA allows you to define virtual networks to be added to/removed from the measurement circuit for a DUT with single ended or balanced ports. This concept is referred to as embedding/deembedding.
  • Page 174 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● A combination of four-port and two-port networks can be applied to any pair of sin- gle-ended ports. Moreover it is possible to combine several port pairs in an arbi- trary order (port pair de-/embedding). ●...
  • Page 175 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.2.3 Circuit Models for 2-Port Networks The lumped element 2-port transformation networks for (de-)embedding consist of the following two basic circuit blocks: ● a capacitor connected in parallel with a resistor ●...
  • Page 176 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed by a serial C or L. They are named Shunt C, Serial L / Shunt L, Serial C / Shunt C, Serial C / Shunt L, Serial L.
  • Page 177 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L and two serial elements, described by imported 2-port S-parameters. They are named Serial 2-port, Shunt C / Serial 2-port, Shunt L / Shunt L, Serial 2-port / Shunt C, Serial 2-port.
  • Page 178 The two port pair (de-)embedding networks in the figure below are based on port pairs 1, 2 and 1, 3 with appropriate sets of 4-port S-parameters. The R&S ZNA FW handles Port Pair De-/Embedding as a special case of Port Set De-/ Embedding.
  • Page 179 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding 5.6.2.6 Port Set De-/Embedding The port set de-/embedding feature allows de-/embedding a linear 2m-port network connecting m physical VNA ports to m physical DUT ports (m≥2). Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 5-9: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several De-/Embedding...
  • Page 180 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding ● For port pairs (i.e. for m=2), the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 5.6.2.5, "Port Pair De-/Embedding", on page 178.
  • Page 181 ● PacketMicro's Smart Fixture De-embedding (SFD) Tool, see https://www.packetmi- cro.com/Products/sfd-tool.html More such fixture modeling tools may be added in future releases of the R&S ZNA firmware. The tools must be installed on the VNA. Test Setup The setup below shows an example for verifying the high-speed differential signal lines on a PCB.
  • Page 182 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
  • Page 183 The R&S ZNA's current implementation of the fixture modeling tool support assumes symmetrical lead-ins and lead-outs. 5.6.2.10 Combining Several De-/Embedding Networks The R&S ZNA allows you to select a combination of networks to be numerically added/ removed at different layers ● 2-port networks at single ended physical ports ●...
  • Page 184 ® Concepts and Features R&S Offset Parameters and De-/Embedding Figure 5-13: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.
  • Page 185 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 2. Single ended deembedding 3. Balanced port deembedding 4. Balanced port embedding 5. Single ended port embedding 5.7 Optional Extensions and Accessories The instrument can be upgraded with various software and hardware options, provid- ing enhanced flexibility and an extended measurement functionality.
  • Page 186 For a complete list of options, accessories, and extras refer to the product brochure or to the "Options" section of the R&S ZNA product pages on the Internet. The following sections provide an introduction to the software and hardware options described in this documentation.
  • Page 187 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories GHz/200 = 2 * 10 Hz, so that Δt = 50 ns. Δt is termed measurement range (in time domain) or unambiguous range. Additional constraints apply if the selected Chirp z-transformation is a lowpass transfor- mation.
  • Page 188 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Integrate impulse response Obtain step response The step response is recommended for impedance measurements and for the analysis of discontinuities (especially inductive and capacitive discontinuities). The impulse response has an unambiguous magnitude and is therefore recommended for most other applications.
  • Page 189 The point symmetry with respect to the DC value makes harmonic grids suitable for lowpass time domain transformations. Visualization of the harmonic grid algorithms The R&S ZNA provides three different algorithms for harmonic grid calculation. The three harmonic grids have the following characteristics: ●...
  • Page 190 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The harmonic grids cannot be calculated for any set of sweep points. If the minimum number of sweep points is smaller than 5, then the interpolation/extrapolation algorithm for additional sweep points does not work. The same is true if the number of sweep points or stop frequency exceeds the upper limit.
  • Page 191 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Window Side lobe Passband Best for... suppression ripple Normal Gate 32 dB 0.032 dB Good compromise between edge steepness (Hann) and side lobe suppression Maximum Flat- 46 dB 0 dB Maximum attenuation of responses outside the ness (Bohman) gate span Arbitrary Gate...
  • Page 192 VSWR posed in standard ANSI C63.25. Hence a R&S ZNA equipped with time domain option K2 supports TD site VSWR mea- surements in accordance with ANSI C63.25. EMC Test Site Validation EMC test sites for radiated emission measurements rely on free-space conditions to minimize the influence of reflections on the received signal.
  • Page 193 With option R&S ZNA-K20, the R&S ZNA firmware implements a "virtual" signal gener- ator that is able to generate multilevel PAM signals (NRZ, PAM-4, PAM-8, PAM-16), including a simulated low pass behavior.
  • Page 194 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-14: Eye Diagram (NRZ modulated) The measurement proceeds as follows: 1. The analyzer performs a frequency sweep. 2. The impulse response is calculated based on the results of the preceding fre- quency sweep.
  • Page 195 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-15: Eye Diagram Result Info Field The following results are available: ● Eye Minimum and Eye Maximum These values represent the minimum and maximum outputs of the eye diagram processing. These values include any over- and under-shoots seen during the symbol transitions.
  • Page 196 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The Crossing Height is the height above "Eye Base" where the rising and falling edges cross, "Crossing Percent" gives the same value as a percentage of the "Eye Amplitude". ● Opening Factor This is a measure of the effects of amplitude noise on the vertical eye opening.
  • Page 197 DUT, which might be more intuitive for users of digital oscilloscopes that are not famil- iar with vector network analyzers. The Automatic Harmonic Grid from the option R&S ZNA-K2 "Time domain Analysis" is used to ease setting up the frequency grid for all measurements provided by the option R&S ZNA-K20.
  • Page 198 5.7.3 Frequency Conversion Measurements Option R&S ZNA-K4 With option R&S ZNA-K4, the frequencies of the source ports can be configured inde- pendently. The source and receive frequencies of the ports are always equal. Arbitrary port settings represent a major extension to the analyzer's measurement functionality;...
  • Page 199 Optional Extensions and Accessories Internal Second Source For a 4-port R&S ZNA, a second internal source is available and hence the mixer mea- surements outlined above (and many other measurements) can be performed without an additional external generator. The limited source connectivity can be overcome with option R&S ZNA-B3 (see...
  • Page 200 1 and 2. For a 4-port R&S ZNA, you can use any combination of analyzer ports that are sup- plied by different internal sources to generate the lower and upper tones. In the follow- ing example, port 3 replaces the external generator.
  • Page 201 LO signal. Lower Tone Upper Tone For a 4-port R&S ZNA with four sources, the mixer's LO signal can also be provided by the VNA. Two-Tone Generation and Combination To generate a two-tone signal, two independent RF signal sources are required.
  • Page 202 The lower-tone port must be a VNA port, the upper-tone port can be an external gener- ator port. For a R&S ZNA that is equipped with option R&S ZNAxx-B213, Internal Combiner P1- P3, the following test setup is recommended: R E F...
  • Page 203 O U T O U T Figure 5-22: Direct access to both ports, coupler as combiner Two internal sources are only available on a 4-port R&S ZNA. Intermodulation Measurement Results The intermodulation measurement provides two different types of results: ●...
  • Page 204 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● In the intermodulation spectrum measurement ("CW Mode Spectrum"), the fre- quency and power of the lower and upper tones is kept constant. The analyzer dis- plays all intermodulation products near the signals up to a selectable order. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 205 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Intermodulation Quantities A nonlinear DUT that is supplied with a two-tone signal with the lower/upper frequen- cies f and f causes emissions at frequencies which correspond to sums and differen- ces of the upper and lower tone frequencies and their integer multiples: –...
  • Page 206 5.7.3.4 Scalar Mixer Measurements Scalar Mixer measurements are included in option R&S ZNA-K4. RF mixers convert an RF signal at one frequency into a signal at another frequency. The frequency that is to be shifted is applied at the RF input. The frequency shifting...
  • Page 207 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories signal (from a local oscillator, LO) is applied to the RF mixer's LO port, resulting in an output signal at the mixer's Intermediate Frequency (IF) port. For a given RF signal, an ideal mixer would produce only two IF outputs: one at the frequency sum of the RF and LO (IF = RF + LO), and another at the frequency difference between the RF and LO (IF = |RF –...
  • Page 208 A test setup with two mixers requires 3 independent source ports plus one receive port. Only a 4-port R&S ZNA with four internal sources (option R&S ZNAff-B3) does not require external generators.
  • Page 209 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories – RF signal (left side): Analyzer port number (e.g. Port 1), frequency sweep range (or fixed frequency, if the LO signal is swept), CW power, frequency con- version settings (1 / 1 denotes no conversion). –...
  • Page 210 5.7.3.5 Vector Mixer Measurements Option R&S ZNA-K5 Option R&S ZNA-K5 enables measurement of the parameters of an external mixer including phase, e.g. the complex conversion loss or reflection coefficients. In contrast to Scalar Mixer Measurements (with option R&S ZNA-K4), vector mixer measurements provide magnitude and phase information, including group delay, about the mixer under test (MUT).
  • Page 211 Fre- quency Conversion Measurements option R&S ZNA-K4. A 4-port R&S ZNA is recommended because of its second internal source. A dedicated cable set for this measurement is provided with accessory R&S ZNAxx-Z9. Group Delay Calculation w/o LO Access The group delay τ...
  • Page 212 DUT may depend on how closely the stimulus signal matches real operating conditions. In true differential mode, a four-port R&S ZNA generates true differential and common mode stimuli at arbitrary reference planes in the test setup and determines mixed- mode S-parameters, wave quantities and ratios.
  • Page 213 Because a 2-port R&S ZNA only has one source, option R&S ZNA-K61 is not avail- able for 2-port instruments. ● Because true differential mode is a special kind of...
  • Page 214 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● In a phase imbalance sweep, the analyzer changes the phase offset between the physical ports within a configurable range. Imbalance Compensation of a Waves Since the mixed-mode S-parameters of a linear balanced DUT depend only on the DUT itself, they will be independent of the amplitude or phase imbalance of the stimu- lus signal.
  • Page 215 The analyzer performs pulsed measurements in analogy to a time sweep (i.e. at con- stant receiver frequency), but with a much higher sampling rate. Option R&S ZNA-K7 provides configuration of the internal pulse modulators and pulse profile measure- ments. The measurement bandwidth can be increased up to 50 MHz.
  • Page 216 The frequency converter R&S ZC110, for example, extend the frequency range of R&S ZNA network analyzers to a W-band range between 75 GHz and 110 GHz. The test ports of the frequency converters and the connecting elements are rectangular waveguides, whose dimensions are according to EIA WR-10, equivalent to RCSR WG-27.
  • Page 217 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Without leveling data (default or recorded with the leveling tool), the measurement is performed at fixed RF source and LO power. No power sweep is possible. To reduce the actual output power of the converters (e.g. for measuring wave quantities or testing compression effects), turn the adjusting knob on top of the converters clockwise.
  • Page 218 Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Power settings To enable n-port converter measurements on an n-port R&S ZNA, you can use the connector at the rear panel of the R&S ZNA as common LO drive port. 5.7.8 Increased IF Bandwidth 30 MHz Option R&S ZNA-K17...
  • Page 219 Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Option R&S ZNA-K50P offers the same functionality as option R&S ZNA-K50, but comes with METAS VNA Tools preinstalled. It can be shipped with new instruments or installed at Rohde&Schwarz service. The purpose of the METAS VNA Tools software is to compute uncertainties of S- parameter measurements.
  • Page 220 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories Figure 5-24: S-parameter measurements with uncertainty bands Required input data for METAS VNA Tools: ● METAS VNA model (noise floor, trace noise, receiver linearity, drift) This model is provided by the analyzer firmware. ●...
  • Page 221 When 100% is reached, the reboot is performed automatically. Option R&S ZNA-K51 is delivered as a separate installer, which has to be run on the R&S ZNA and requires administrative privileges. The installed service runs in the back- ground and can be accessed via the Windows system tray.
  • Page 222 For standard Windows users, SWP is disabled. To enable it, right-click the system tray icon and select one of the available actions: For details see the R&S ZNA-K51 user manual that is installed with the software. 5.7.12 Internal 3rd and 4th Source for 4-port R&S ZNA R&S ZNAxx-B3...
  • Page 223 5.7.14 Internal Second LO Generator (up to 26.5 GHz) Option R&S ZNA-B5 For a 4-port R&S ZNA, hardware option R&S ZNA-B5 provides a second LO that ena- bles parallel measurement of a and b waves in frequency converting measurements. This option is not available for 2-port R&S ZNA.
  • Page 224 This port is particularly useful for driving millimeter wave converters. If you use a power splitter to connect the LO Out of the R&S ZNA to the LO In ports of the converters, then it is possible to measure n converter ports with an n-port R&S ZNA, without the need for an external generator.
  • Page 225 Attenuation can be set from 0 to 70 dB, in steps of 10 dB. 5.7.20 Direct IF Access Option R&S ZNA-B26 Hardware option R&S ZNA-B26 enables direct access to the IF signal path of the R&S ZNA via Rear Panel connectors IF Reference <i>...
  • Page 226 R&S ZNAxx. Switch times are limited to 1 μs or higher. 5.7.23 Trigger Board Option R&S ZNA-B91 Hardware option R&S ZNA-B91 adds the following BNC connectors to the Chap- ter 4.2.2, "Rear Panel", on page 25 of the R&S ZNA:...
  • Page 227 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories 5.7.24 Direct Source Monitor Access R&S ZNAxx-B161/163 For instruments that are equipped with Source Step Attenuators, the direct source monitor options give access to the unattenuated generator signals of port 1 and 3. The signal does not have to pass the respective source step attenuator, which is particu- larly useful for measurements requiring a very low stimulus power, such as high gain (converter) measurements.
  • Page 228 Chapter 5.7.19, "Source Step Attenuators", on page 225) ● To retrofit a direct source monitor access, the R&S ZNA must be sent to Rohde & Schwarz service. 5.7.25 Internal Combiner P1–P3 Option R&S ZNAxx-B213 On a four-port R&S ZNAxx with hardware option B213, the (independent) source sig- nals generated at physical ports 1 and 3 can be internally combined and routed to port 1.
  • Page 229 R&S ZNA (via the adapter) To get the adapter to work, you have to install the NI VISA library on the R&S ZNA. 5.7.27 External Power Meters The connection of an external power meter to the R&S ZNA can serve different purpo- ses.
  • Page 230 (System – [Setup] > "External Devices" > "Power Meters"). Configured power meters appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNA, e.g. in the port configuration and in the power calibration dia- logs.
  • Page 231 A reset of the network analyzer does not affect the last zeroing result. 5.7.28 External Generators The connection of an external generator to the R&S ZNA can serve different purposes. ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external generator represents an addi- tional source port.
  • Page 232 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories USB ports Control connection (e.g. USB) External generator ● Power calibration: An external generator can provide the reference signal for a source or receiver calibration. A typical example is a receiver power calibration using a measured wave b User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 233 External generators must be configured in the System – [Setup] softtool before they are available as additional sources. Configured generators appear in many control ele- ments of the R&S ZNA, e.g. in the "More Ratios", "More Wave Quantities", port config- uration and power calibration dialogs.
  • Page 234 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories ● Use another device as master: Set the analyzer to "External" frequency reference and synchronize it (and all other devices) to the master's reference clock signal, fed in at the Reference In connector on the analyzer's rear panel. Fast sweep mode and conditions In list mode the external generator steps through a predefined list of frequencies or sig- nal powers.
  • Page 235 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories The firmware support of the R&S ZVAX-TRM extension unit is based on the generic devices functionality. A generic device's control interface is declared in one or more device configuration files, using the popular JavaScript Object Notation (*.json file format).
  • Page 236 5.7.30 External DLLs The R&S ZNA firmware provides a plug-in interface that allows you to extend the VNA firmware with custom (measurement) functionality. The plug-in interface allows the external software to interact with the firmware: ●...
  • Page 237 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories To fulfill its purpose, the plug-in can communicate with other processes / peripherals that are not part of the VNA firmware or host OS. 5.7.30.1 Basic Use Case A basic use case is the integration of a power supply into an arbitrary VNA sweep. Suppose that you want to test an amplifier with various bias settings.
  • Page 238 ® Concepts and Features R&S Optional Extensions and Accessories If an external DLL is configured for permanent use, it performs a particlar task (such as switching the state of a DUT or controlling external devices) without providing data. 5.7.30.3 Trace Calculation in the Channel Calculation Chain To enable the calculation of trace results using data from external DLLs, a dedicated calculation step for external DLLs is inserted directly after the averaging step in the cal- culation chain (see...
  • Page 239 ® GUI Reference R&S Function Keys and Softtools 6 GUI Reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened in the following ways: ●...
  • Page 240 ® GUI Reference R&S Function Keys and Softtools Table 6-1: Function keys and softtools Function Key Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action Trace – [Meas] Alt + Shift + A Meas Softtool default Trace – [Format] Alt + Shift + B Format Softtool default Trace –...
  • Page 241 DUTs (see Chapter 6.2.1, "Measurement Type", on page 241). Access: Trace – [Meas] Background information For a detailed description of all measurement results of the R&S ZNA, refer to Chap- ter 5.3, "Measurement Results", on page 101. Efficient trace handling To select a result and display it as a trace, you can simply drag and drop the corre- sponding button into a diagram area.
  • Page 242 S-Params Wave Tab Ratio Tab Gain Compression Tab Power Sensor Tab External DLL Tab Harmonics Tab No dedicated channel setup avail- R&S ZNA-K4 able Intermodulation Tab Intermodulation (non-frequency converting) Time Domain Tab Time domain measurements R&S ZNA-K2 Time Gate Tab...
  • Page 243 GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Mixer Params (Frequency Converting DUTs) All frequency converting measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K4 (see Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 198). If this option is not available, the "Mixer Params" measurement type and the corresponding tabs are not available.
  • Page 244 Chapter 5.3.7, "Stability Factors", on page 118 6.2.2.1 Controls on the S-Params Tab The appearance of the "S-Params" tab depends on whether the R&S ZNA is equipped with the Frequency Conversion Measurements option R&S ZNA-K4. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 245 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Setup Opens the S-Params Setup Dialog. S-Parameter (selector) Selects an S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Single-ended (unbalanced) S-parameters are referred to as S<out>< in>, where <out> and <in> denote the output and input logical port numbers, respectively. In presence of balanced ports, standard S-parameters are defined in the form S<m_out><m_in><out><in>, where output mode <m_out>...
  • Page 246 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool S<out><in> Selects one of the four elements of the standard 2-port S-parameters as a measured quantity for the active trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21" | "S22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "S11" | "S12" | "S21"...
  • Page 247 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool For background information, see Chapter 5.3.3.1, "Converted Impedances", on page 106. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S11" | "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S11" | "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... Y <- S-Parameters ←...
  • Page 248 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y11" | "Z11" ... Imbalance/CMRR ← Y/Z/k/μ-Parameters Allows you to select an imbalance or common mode rejection ratio (CMRR) parameter as measured quantity. These measurements are only available if at least one balanced port is active.
  • Page 249 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool A typical application of stability factors is to assess the stability of an amplifier. Stability factors cannot be calculated in balanced port configurations. For background informa- tion, see Chapter 5.3.7, "Stability Factors", on page 118. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "KFAC21"...
  • Page 250 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.2.3 More S-Params Dialog Allows to select an arbitrary S-parameter as measured quantity, along with a suitable Detector. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" > "More S-Params..." S-Parameter "S-Parameter (selector)" on page 245. Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data.
  • Page 251 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool This dialog can only be opened, if a balanced and two single-ended logical ports are configured in the Balanced Ports Dialog. ● The Logical Port on the left represents the balanced test port: any (active) bal- anced logical port can be selected ●...
  • Page 252 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "IMB<i>-<j><k>" | "IMB<j><k>-<i>" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "IMB<i>-<j><k>" | "IMB<j><k>-<i>" 6.2.2.5 Balanced Ports Dialog The "Balanced Ports" dialog allows you to enable/disable physical ports and to define logical ports (balanced or unbalanced) in the active channel. Access: Channel –...
  • Page 253 True Differential Mode Activates/deactivates True Differential Mode This checkbox is only visible if True Differential Mode option R&S ZNA-K61 is availa- ble. It is enabled, if at least one balanced port is configured, whose physical ports are fed by independent sources (see Chapter 5.7.12, "Internal 3rd and 4th Source for 4-port...
  • Page 254 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Physical Ports / Logical Ports Allows you to renumber logical ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt> SOURce<Ch>:LPORt<LogPt>:CLEar Define Physical to Logical Port Relation Allows you to define balanced, single-ended, and unused ports. In principle, it is possi- ble to combine any pair of two physical ports into a balanced port.
  • Page 255 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-1: Reference Impedance Tab (4 physical ports) By default, the reference impedance of a physical port is set to the reference impe- dance of the connector type assigned to the port. However, it can be defined as an arbitrary complex value (renormalization of port impedances).
  • Page 256 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PORT<PhyPt>:ZREFerence [SENSe<Ch>:]LPORt<LogPt>:ZCOMmon [SENSe<Ch>:]LPORt<LogPt>:ZDIFferent Connector Allows you to specify the connector type of the related physical port. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<PhyPt> Use Default Allows you to toggle between default and renormalized port impedance (or impedan- ces) for the selected logical port and connector type.
  • Page 257 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.3.1 Controls on the Wave Tab The "Setup" button opens the S-Params Setup Dialog. The "More Wave Quantities..." button opens the More Wave Quantities dialog which allows to select an arbitrary wave quantity, e.g. for different source ports or higher port numbers.
  • Page 258 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● "b1 Source Port 2" is the wave received at physical port 1. In a standard S-parame- ter measurement, this wave is transmitted at port 2 of the DUT (reverse measure- ment). ● "b2 Source Port 2" is the wave received at physical port 2. In a standard S-parame- ter measurement, this wave is fed to the output port (port 2) of the DUT (reverse measurement).
  • Page 259 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ●...
  • Page 260 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool To configure external generators, use the "External Generators" dialog. See Chap- ter 5.7.28, "External Generators", on page 231. Properties Allows you to select the measurement detector and the display unit for the selected wave quantity. Detector ←...
  • Page 261 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.4.1 Controls on the Ratio Tab The "Setup" button opens the S-Params Setup Dialog. The "More Ratios..." button opens the More Ratios dialog which allows to select an arbitrary ratio of wave quantities. b<i> / a<j> Source Port <j> Selects predefined complex ratios of the standard 2-port wave quantities a...
  • Page 262 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● "b1/a2 Source Port 2" is the ratio of the wave quantities b and a and corresponds to the S-parameter S (reverse transmission coefficient). The analyzer can also measure arbitrary ratios for other source ports; see Chap- ter 6.2.4.2, "More Ratios Dialog",...
  • Page 263 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ● The source port for the stimulus signal must be specified in addition. ●...
  • Page 264 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Port Allows you to select the source for the stimulus signal. ● "None", "Port <Pt>", or "Conv <Pt>", if Use Generator as Source is not checked ● "Gen <i>" if "Use Generator as Source" is checked Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>"...
  • Page 265 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool b2 2nd Harmonic Src Port 1 Power of the outgoing wave at port 2, measured at 2 times the frequency of the wave generated at port 1. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure '<TraceName>', 'h2b2(p1)' CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<TraceName>', 'h2b2(p1)' b2 3rd Harmonic Src Port 1 Power of the outgoing wave at port 2, measured at 2 times the frequency of the wave generated at port 1...
  • Page 266 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Define Selects the harmonic to be measured. A "Frequency out of range" warning is displayed the harmonic frequency to be mea- sured exceeds the frequency range of the analyzer. The harmonic traces are truncated at the maximum receiver frequency.
  • Page 267 Allows you to set up the channel for an intermodulation measurement, and to select intermodulation products and other results as measured quantities. Intermodulation measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K4. They are availa- ble for both non-frequency converting and frequency converting DUTs.
  • Page 268 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Intermod The "Intermod" button opens the intermodulation setup dialog that allows you to set up the intermodulation measurement: ● Non-frequency converting ● Frequency converting Intermod Product After the intermodulation measurement has been set up (see "Intermod"...
  • Page 269 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool CW Mode Spectrum In CW spectrum mode, the intermodulation measurement is performed at fixed fre- quency of the lower tone ("CW Frequency") and the upper tone ("CW Frequency" + "Tone Distance"). The analyzer displays intermodulation products up to a selectable order ("IM Order") around the lower and upper tone frequencies.
  • Page 270 ● "Spectrum = Marker" This button is only available if the analyzer is equipped with software option R&S ZNA-K1; see "Spectrum = Marker" on page 386. If there is no marker in the active intermodulation trace, the center frequency of the related channel is used.
  • Page 271 For a 2-port R&S ZNA, the upper tone must be provided by an external generator. ● For a 4-port R&S ZNA, upper tone and lower tone must be provided by different sources. I.e. without the optional Internal 3rd and 4th Source for 4-port R&S ZNA, you can not combine ports 1 and 2 or ports 3 and 4.
  • Page 272 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "External Use the signal from the source out (direct access) of the lower tone (Direct port and the signal from the upper tone port, combine them externally, Access)" and feed the combined signal to the source in (direct access) of the lower tone port: With this configuration, the two-tone signal is available at test port 1.
  • Page 273 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Internal" For a 4-port R&S ZNA that is equipped with option Internal Combiner P1–P3 (R&S ZNAxx-B213), internal signal combination of port 1 and port 3 is possible: The tones must be generated at VNA ports 1 and 3, the combined signal is output to port 1.
  • Page 274 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Delta F" The channel performs a CW Mode sweep whose standard parame- ters can be set in the dialog (see "CW Frequency/Number of Points/ Base Power" on page 274). The frequency distance between lower tone and upper tone starts at "Start Delta Freq."...
  • Page 275 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Access: "Frequency Overview" in various channel mode setup dialogs The settings in the channel mode setup dialog from which the "Frequency Overview" dialog was called cannot be applied unless all measured frequency ranges are valid. 6.2.6.3 Intermodulation Setup Dialog (Frequency Converting) The frequency converting intermodulation setup dialog is an instance of the...
  • Page 276 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.6.4 Intermodulation Measurements Dialog Allows you to select the measured quantities that are relevant for intermodulation mea- surements. Access: Trace – [Meas] > "Intermodulation" > "Intermod Product" | "Intercept Point" | "Main Tone" Background information Refer to "Intermodulation Quantities"...
  • Page 277 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Same as IM<order><side>O but in this case the intermodulation product is displayed in dBc units relative to the measured lower tone level at the DUT output ("Lower Tone at DUT Out"). The relative result is often termed "intermodulation suppression". Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine...
  • Page 278 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool "Lower Tone at DUT Out" (LTO), "Lower Tone at DUT In" (LTI), "Upper Tone at DUT Out" (UTO), and "Upper Tone at DUT In" (UTI) are measurements of the two funda- mental waves of the intermodulation measurement. 6.2.7 Gain Compression Tab Allows you to configure and perform compression point over frequency measurements.
  • Page 279 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.7.1 Controls on the Gain Compression Tab Amplifier Compression/Setup Frequency Converting DUT Opens the Multi-channel Setup Dialog for gain compression measurements: ● Chapter 6.2.7.2, "Amplifier Compression Setup Dialog", on page 279 for non- frequency converting DUTs ●...
  • Page 280 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-4: Amplifier Compression dialog Driving Port/Receiving Port Selects the driving and receiving port for the gain compression measurement. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:SRCPort [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:COMPression:RECeiver Sweep Type Compression measurement channels are set up for linear frequency sweeps. For each point on the (linear) frequency grid, the firmware performs a power sweep.
  • Page 281 Meas Softtool > "Mixer Params" > "Gain Compression" > "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" 6.2.8 Time Domain Tab The "Time Domain" tab is enabled by software option R&S ZNA-K2. It mirrors the Time Domain Tab of the Trace – [Trace Config] softtool.
  • Page 282 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.9 Time Gate Tab The "Time Gate" tab is enabled by software option R&S ZNA-K2. It mirrors the Time Gate Tab of the Trace – [Trace Config] softtool. 6.2.10 Power Sensor Tab Allows you to set up and perform measurements using external power sensors.
  • Page 283 Opens the Port Settings Dialog. 6.2.11 Spectrum Tab The "Spectrum" tab allows you to set up spectrum measurements. Spectrum measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K1. If this option is not installed, the "Spectrum" tab is hidden. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 284 "AVG" "Min Hold" The minimum value is determined from several sweeps and dis- played. The R&S ZNA saves the sweep result in the trace memory only if the new value is lower than the previous one. "Max Hold" The maximum value is determined over several sweeps and dis- played.
  • Page 285 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Trace mode Infinite averaging Hold mode "Clear Write" "Hold OFF" "AVG" "Hold OFF" "Min Hold" "Min Hold" "Max Hold" "Max Hold" Reset History to reset the averaging/minimization/maximization history. Remote command: Use the commands for Infinite Averaging Hold according to the table above.
  • Page 286 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-5: Spectrum Setup dialog (non frequency-converting DUT) Sweep Type / ... / Base Power Basic frequency sweep settings as defined in the Stimulus Tab Sweep Params Tab. In spectrum mode, the receiver is swept linearly. Resolution BW Sets the resolution bandwidth, see "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 287 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Access: Trace – [Meas] > "S-Params" mode > "External DLL" 6.2.12.1 Controls on the External DLL Tab Initially, only the "Configuration / Perm. Settings" on page 287 button is available on the "External DLL" tab. Each external DLL <ext_dll_name>.dll that provides at least one custom trace type, adds a button "<ext_dll_name>"...
  • Page 288 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Loaded DLLs table Displays the loaded plug-in DLLs and their configuration in the current channel. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:LIST? Active ← Loaded DLLs table Allows you to de-/activate the respective plugin in the current channel. An active plugin can be used to create traces and/or can be made Permanent.
  • Page 289 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Version/Interface Version ← Loaded DLLs table "Version" is purely informative. It reports the version of the DLL, as specified by its developer. "Interface Version" is the version of the plug-in SDK that was used to compile the DLL (more precisely, the version of the interface RsVnaCustomDllInterface.h against which it was compiled).
  • Page 290 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:TASK:ADDRess 6.2.12.3 Trace Definition Dialog Specifies a custom trace that is provided by an external DLL. Access: External DLL Tab > "Measurement" section buttons Figure 6-6: Trace Definition dialog In the VNA firmware, the following string represents the measured quantity: Cu(P<Src Port>)<lowercase_ext_dll_name>/<Task Type>/<Additional Input>...
  • Page 291 Gain measurements ● Reflection feedthrough measurements ● Wave measurements These measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K4. If this option is not instal- led, the "Scalar Mixer Meas" tab is not available. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.3.4, "Scalar Mixer Measurements", on page 206.
  • Page 292 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● The "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" button opens the Scalar Mixer Meas Setup Dialog that allows you to prepare one or more channels for Scalar Mixer Measurements. ● The "More ..." buttons open the Frequency Converting Measurements Dialog that offers all available measurement parameters for scalar mixer measurements.
  • Page 293 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool In its upper part, the dialog shows a diagram with the RF and LO signals, the mixing product (IF), and the current frequency and power ranges for all signals. The diagram is adjusted according to the "2nd Mixer" selection; see "Two-Stage Mixer Measure- ments"...
  • Page 294 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool The frequency-converting device is considered to be part of the mixer system under test (MUT). In the default configuration where the RF signal is swept and the LO sig- nals are at fixed frequency, the conversion factors do not modify the analyzer's source signals (RF, LO 1, LO 2).
  • Page 295 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:PMFixed [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:TFRequency<Stg> [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:MIXer:STAGes Activates the scalar mixer mode and closes the dialog. A "Mix" label in the channel list indicates that a scalar mixer measurement is active. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion 6.2.13.2 Frequency Converting Measurements Dialog The "Frequency Converting Measurements"...
  • Page 296 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Figure 6-8: Frequency Converting Measurements dialog: vector mixer measurements Conversion Gain/Conversion Phase Tab Conversion Gain tab (scalar/vector mixer measurements) Offers the full set of gain measurement parameters for frequency-converting DUTs. Conversion Phase tab (vector mixer measurements) Offers the full set of phase measurement parameters for frequency-converting DUTs.
  • Page 297 Sets up the channel for phase measurements on a frequency converting DUT (a.k.a. vector mixer measurements), and lets you select the quantities to be measured. These measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K5. If this option is not instal- led, the "Vector Mixer Meas" tab is not available.
  • Page 298 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool ● The "Setup Frequency Converting DUT" button opens the Vector Mixer Meas Setup Dialog that allows you to prepare one or more channels for Vector Mixer Measurements ● The "More ..." buttons open the Frequency Converting Measurements Dialog that offers all available measurement parameters for mixer measurements.
  • Page 299 Sets up the channel for a two-tone group delay measurement (a.k.a. mixer group delay measurement with embedded LO), and selects the measured quantities. These measurements require software option R&S ZNA-K9. If this option is not instal- led, the "Two Tone Group Dly" tab is not available.
  • Page 300 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool 6.2.15.1 Controls on the Two Tone Group Dly Tab Setup Frequency Converting DUT Opens the Two Tone Group Delay Setup Dialog. Measurement Allows you to select the quantities to be measured. 2 Tone Delta Freq. Allows you to select the frequency delta between upper tone and lower tone.
  • Page 301 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Use Constant Cal Dly ← Mixer Delay If checked, you can specify a constant calibration delay. Otherwise you can use the "Variable Cal Dly" button to pick a CSV file with delay data for the reference mixer. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:CDMode Constant Cal Dly/Variable Cal Dly ←...
  • Page 302 ® GUI Reference R&S Meas Softtool Lower Tone Select the port that generates the lower tone of the two-tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:LTONe Lower Tone Select the port that generates the upper tone of the two-tone signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:UTONe Select the receive port for the two-tone group delay measurement.
  • Page 303 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:MDELay:CONVersion 6.3 Format Softtool The "Format" softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area. Access: Trace – [Format] Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 6.2, "Meas Softtool",...
  • Page 304 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The magnitude of the complex quantity C, i.e. |C| = sqrt ( Re(C) + Im(C) ), appears on the vertical axis, scaled in dB. The decibel conversion is calculated according to dB Mag(C) = 20 * log(|C|) dB.
  • Page 305 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Polar Selects a polar diagram to display a complex quantity, primarily an S-parameter or ratio. Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
  • Page 306 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e. φ (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. φ (C) is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (refer- ence phase = 0°).
  • Page 307 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
  • Page 308 ® GUI Reference R&S Format Softtool Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay, a fre- quency sweep must be active. Tip: The cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often can be assumed to be constant.
  • Page 309 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool With n sweep steps the delay at sweep point no. m is calculated as follows: ● If n is even (n = 2k), then Δf (m) = f (m+k) – f (m–k) and ΔΦ(m) = ΔΦ (m+k) – ΔΦ (m–k).
  • Page 310 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool The "Scale Values" settings are closely related to the "Format" and "Display" settings. The "Scale Values" settings depend on the current trace format (diagram type) because not all diagrams can be scaled in the same way: ●...
  • Page 311 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Alternatives to Scaling There are several alternatives to manual trace/diagram scaling. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.7, "Scaling Diagrams", on page 50 ● Chapter 4.3.3, "Touchscreen Gestures", on page 38 (zoom stimulus via spreading and pinching) ●...
  • Page 312 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Ref Value Sets the reference line of a Cartesian diagram or the outer circumference of a circular diagram. ● In Cartesian diagrams "Ref Value" defines the value of the reference line, indicated by an arrowhead symbol at the right edge of the diagram area. The color of the symbol corresponds to the trace color.
  • Page 313 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Related settings Refer to Chapter 6.5.1.3, "Trace Manager Dialog", on page 318. The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager Dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
  • Page 314 ® GUI Reference R&S Scale Softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.3.7, "Scaling Diagrams", on page 50 ● Chapter 6.4.1, "Scale Values Tab", on page 309 ● Chapter 4.3.3, "Touchscreen Gestures", on page 38 (zoom stimulus via spreading and pinching)
  • Page 315 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool You can define the zoom area using touchscreen or mouse. To modify the zoom win- dow in graphical zoom mode, you can also use the numerical input fields "Max", "Min", "Start", and "Stop". Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a...
  • Page 316 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.1.3, "Traces, Channels and Diagrams", on page 65 ● Chapter 4.3.5, "Handling Diagrams, Traces, and Markers", on page 42 In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other;...
  • Page 317 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Add Trace Creates a trace in the active Diagram / Channel and makes it the Active Trace. The new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace, but displayed in another color. The former and the new active trace overlay each other. Change the ref- erence position or select a different measurement for the new trace to separate them (see Chapter 6.2, "Meas...
  • Page 318 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● "Show All Traces" makes all traces of the active diagram visible Note: ● These actions can also be performed from the context menu of the trace name segment in the trace list (see Chapter 5.2.1.4, "Channel List and Channel Set- tings", on page 86).
  • Page 319 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool All existing traces of the current recall set are listed in a table with several editable (white) or non-editable (gray) columns. Table Area The table contains the following columns: ● "Name" indicates name of the related trace. Trace names must be unambiguous across all channels and diagram areas in a recall set.
  • Page 320 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:REName CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:REName DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW on page 968 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:LABel:SHOW CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow:TRACe? DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:NAME:ID? Creates a trace based on the Active Trace. In particular, the trace is assigned to the channel and diagram of the active trace. However, its "Scale" coupling is not adopted. The default names for new traces are "Trc<n>", where <n>...
  • Page 321 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Background information Refer to "Trace Types" on page 78. Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace, it is displayed in the same dia- gram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace. The memory trace displayed in the active diagram;...
  • Page 322 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Active Trace vs. Active Data Trace In the context of memory traces we distinguish between the active trace and the active data trace. ● If the active trace is a memory trace, then the active data trace is the data trace to which the memory trace is associated.
  • Page 323 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Show <Active Data Trace> Shows or hides the active data trace in the diagram. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW Show <Mem> Shows or hides the active memory trace or the first memory trace of the active data trace.
  • Page 324 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool All Data & Func to <Destination> Stores the current data of all data traces in the active recall set to memory traces, in accordance with the Destination setting. Trace functions are applied to the stored traces.
  • Page 325 "Formatted Data" section define math operations on for- matted trace data. "Complex Data" math is available in all firmware versions of all R&S ZNx vector net- work analyzers. "Formatted Data" math was added in version 1.80 of the R&S ZNA firmware. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 326 E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZNA can eval- uate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>" or "Data - <Mem>".
  • Page 327 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.4.2 User Def Math Dialog The "User Def Math" dialog defines a mathematical trace for the active trace. Each measurement point of the original trace is replaced by the corresponding point of the mathematical trace. Access: Trace –...
  • Page 328 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Expression builder The mathematical expression appears in the upper part of the dialog. The operands and operators in the expression can be selected from a keyboard and the list of "Oper- ands": ● The keyboard supports the entry of numeric values, constants, and mathematical functions.
  • Page 329 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The trace operands denote unmodified data and memory traces. Trace math and other trace functions ("Smoothing", "Hold", "Shift Trace" etc.) are not taken into account. Table 6-4: Effect of the operators on a complex quantity z = x + jy. +, -, *, / Basic arithmetic operations Grouping parts of an expression...
  • Page 330 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● If "Result is Wave Quantity" is disabled the analyzer assumes that the result of the mathematical expression is dimensionless. Examples for dimensionless expres- sions are all terms proportional to ratios of wave quantities, e.g. Data / Mem2[Trc1]. The selected trace format is applied without previous conversion.
  • Page 331 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNA-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain" and Time Gate Tab tabs are hidden. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.2, "Time Domain Analysis", on page 186.
  • Page 332 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus Impulse Response Selects a window type which the R&S ZNA uses to filter the trace in the frequency domain. The drop-down list shows the impulse response of a constant trace over a finite sweep range (i.e. a rectangular function) that was filtered using the different avail- able window types.
  • Page 333 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The analyzer always uses a "No Profiling (Rectangle)" window to calculate the time- gated frequency domain trace, see "Time-Gated Frequency Domain Trace" on page 191. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow Side Lobe Level Defines the side lobe suppression for an "Arbitrary Sidelobes (Dolph-Chebychev)" win- dow.
  • Page 334 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.5.2 Low Pass Settings Dialog The "Low Pass Settings" dialog defines the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms. Access: Trace – [Trace Config] > "Time Domain" > "Low Pass Settings..." Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.2.4, "Harmonic Grid",...
  • Page 335 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool such a way that the frequency gap (i.e. the "Freq Step Size") remains approxi- mately the same. This algorithm can increase the sweep time, due to the additional sweep points introduced. The three grids can be calculated repeatedly in any order; the analyzer always starts from the original set of sweep points.
  • Page 336 DUT without the contribution of the unwanted responses. The time gate is inde- pendent of the frequency window used to filter the trace before transforming it to time domain. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNA-K2. If this option is not installed, the Time Domain Tab and "Time Gate" tabs are hidden.
  • Page 337 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME[:TYPE] Shape Selects a gate shape which the R&S ZNA uses to filter the trace in the time domain. The drop-down list visualizes how the time gate will affect a constant function after transformation back into the frequency domain. The selected window is applied to the active trace.
  • Page 338 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.7 Trace Statistics Tab Evaluates statistical and phase information of the entire trace or of a specific evalua- tion range and calculates the x-dB compression point. 6.5.7.1 Controls on the Trace Statistics Tab The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.5.7.2, "Evaluation Range Dialog",...
  • Page 339 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Suppose that the trace in the evaluation range contains n stimulus values x and n cor- responding response values y (measurement points). The statistical values are obtained as follows: ● "Min" and "Max" are the largest and the smallest of all response values y ●...
  • Page 340 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Phase/El Length Displays or hides the phase delay ("Phs Dly") and the electrical length ("El Len") of the trace in the selected evaluation range ("Evaluation Range..."). The parameters are only available for trace formats that contain phase information, i.e. for the formats "Phase" , "Unwr Phase"...
  • Page 341 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool the straight line between points A and B. The flatness is the difference between the largest and the smallest response value of this difference trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Compr. Point / Compr. Val. Displays or hides all results related to the x dB (or x degrees) compression point of the trace, where x is the selected compression value.
  • Page 342 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The info field shows invalid results ('----') if the wrong sweep type or trace format is selected, or if no compression point with the configured properties was found. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA Reference Value Selects the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation.
  • Page 343 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW Defined Value This setting is only visible if "Defined Value" is used as Reference Value. It manually defines the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RPHase...
  • Page 344 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set. "Full Span" means that the search range is equal to the entire sweep range. The trace statistics functions consider all measurement points with stimulus values x between the "Start"...
  • Page 345 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool ● The analyzer can export the raw complex (unformatted) data or formatted data. The unformatted data are independent of all "Smooth Shift Hold" settings; see "Formatted Values" on page 353. ● For complex traces, if marker format and trace format do not coincide, the marker values are calculated before Smoothing Hold...
  • Page 346 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Tip: The sweep average is an alternative method of compensating for random effects on the trace by averaging consecutive traces. Compared to smoothing, the sweep average requires a longer measurement time but does not have the drawback of aver- aging out quick variations of the measured values.
  • Page 347 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool The "Hold" process can be restarted any time using "Restart" (current trace) or "Restart All" (all traces in the active recall set). The "Hold" process is also restarted automatically when the channel or trace settings are changed so that the previous measurement results are no longer compatible.
  • Page 348 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Shift Reset Resets the static shifting, defined using Stimulus Mag / Phase / Real / Imag respectively. Tracking Mode/Ref Sweep Point Allows you to take the trace value at a selected sweep point as the reference point for a dynamic shift of the active trace.
  • Page 349 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool "Magnitude - Perform averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex Phase" trace value. Perform averaging of the real and imaginary part of the complex trace Real - Imag value (i.e. over the complex value itself). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE 6.5.10 Trace Data Tab...
  • Page 350 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.10.1 Import Complex Data Dialog The "Import Complex Data" dialog loads a memory trace from a trace file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. The loaded trace data is used to generate a memory trace which is coupled to the active data trace.
  • Page 351 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool 6.5.10.2 Export Data - <File Type> Dialog The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog stores data or memory traces to a trace file. Trace files are ASCII files with selectable file format. Access: ● Trace –...
  • Page 352 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Figure 6-10: ASCII Trace Files Export The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with a number of additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type").
  • Page 353 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Symmetric Params For Touchstone file export only: activates/deactivates the export of symmetric (bal- anced) S-parameters. Note: ● Please observe the "Conditions for Touchstone file export" on page 129. In particu- lar: if only one port of a balanced port is selected, then the export will fail. ●...
  • Page 354 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Decimal Separator For ASCII (*.csv) files only: Selects either the "Point" or the "Comma" (if needed to process the exported data with an external application) as a separator for decimal numbers. Save Stores the trace data, according to the selected options. Tip: Note the conditions described in "Conditions for Touchstone file export"...
  • Page 355 129. Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZNA checks the channel data for com- patibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces; see "Conditions for Touchstone...
  • Page 356 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Reset Port Assignments Restores the identity between original and assigned port number. Save Settings in Recall Set The "Select Ports" dialog preserves the selected and assigned port numbers. By default (unchecked), these settings are global, i.e. they are identical for each recall set and are not affected by a [Preset].
  • Page 357 ® GUI Reference R&S Traces Softtool Note that if both Slope Constant are zero (default), the linearity deviation view sim- ply reproduces the original trace. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:MODE Auto Linearity Deviation Turns linearity deviation calculation and (re)calculates Constant Slope using linear regression.
  • Page 358 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool 6.6 Lines Softtool The "Lines" softtool allows you to define limits for the measurement results, visualize them in the diagrams and activate/deactivate the limit check. The analyzer provides upper, lower, ripple and circle limits. In addition, the "Lines" softtool provides functions to limit complex diagrams to a user-defined "Display Circle"...
  • Page 359 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool The "Define Limit Line..." button opens the "Define Limit Lines" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.6.1.2, "Define Limit Lines Dialog", on page 362). Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area.
  • Page 360 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool The "Limit Fail Trace Color" and the appearance of the limit fail symbols are defined in Define User Color Scheme Dialog ("Display" > "Config" > "Define User Color..."). Note: ● Limit check and display of limit lines are independent of each other: –...
  • Page 361 No fail beep can be gen- erated if the limit check is switched off. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 362 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool If a channel contains several traces, is possible to assign each of them to any TTL out- put. The assignment divides the traces of the channel into four groups: ● not assigned to signal 1 or signal 2 ●...
  • Page 363 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool When you switch to a different sweep type, existing limit lines are preserved. With a different sweep variable, however, the limit lines cannot be displayed and the corre- sponding limit check cannot be executed. If you want to define limit lines for the new sweep variable, you first have to delete all existing limit lines for the old sweep variable.
  • Page 364 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool – For formula-defined line segments, it displays the formula. Tap the "Response" field to open the Response Dialog that offers the full range of configuration possibilities. ● "Interpolation" determines whether the limit line segment is interpolated linearly or logarithmically.
  • Page 365 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:LIMit MMEMory:STORe:LIMit Get Trace... / Import File... ● "Get Trace..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a data or memory trace in the active recall set. The active trace must be cartesian and the "Format" of the imported trace must be the same as the "Format"...
  • Page 366 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool In case the selected file contains more than one trace, another popup dialog lets you select the adequate one: Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n – 1, where n is the "Number of Points"...
  • Page 367 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool ● "Linear": Define the line segment as a straight line, connecting the endpoints ("Start Stimulus","Start Response") and ("Stop Stimulus","Stop Response"). In this case, you can also decide whether linear or logarithmic interpolation is used. ●...
  • Page 368 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian dia- gram area. The vertical positions of the ripple lines are recalculated after each sweep; only their stimulus range and distance (the ripple limit) are fixed. Note: Display of the limit line and limit check are independent of each other: Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check.
  • Page 369 No fail beep can be generated if the ripple limit check is switched off. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 370 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool 6.6.2.2 Define Ripple Test Dialog The "Define Ripple Test" dialog defines the ripple limits for the active trace on a range- by-range basis. A separate ripple limit can be assigned to each range. Access: Trace – [Line] > "Ripple Test" > "Def. Ripple Test..." Defining ripple limits with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle ripple limit ranges effi- ciently:...
  • Page 371 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool ● "Ripple Limit" is the maximum allowed difference between the largest and the smallest trace value in the range. The ripple limit range is displayed as two parallel, horizontal lines in the diagram. "Stop Stimulus"...
  • Page 372 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool 6.6.3 Circle Test Tab Defines circular limit lines for complex trace formats ("Polar" , "Smith" , "Inv Smith" ), visualizes them in the diagram and activates/deactivates the circle limit check. Most of the control elements in the "Circle Test" tab are disabled if the active trace has a cartesian format.
  • Page 373 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool The limit line colors are defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chap- ter 6.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 656). You can choose between various options: ● Assign the same color to traces and associated limit lines. ●...
  • Page 374 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool The appearance of the limit fail symbols is defined in the "Define User Color Scheme" dialog (see Chapter 6.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 656). You can choose between various options: ● Change the trace color between failed measurement points.
  • Page 375 No fail beep can be gen- erated if the limit check is switched off. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 376 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA Global Check "Global Check" on page 361. TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass" on page 361. 6.6.4 Display Circle Tab The "Display Circle" functionality allows you to limit results in complex trace formats (Smith, Polar) to a user-defined circle.
  • Page 377 ® GUI Reference R&S Lines Softtool left ("FAIL") = "Circle Test" enabled, but not limited to "Display Circle" right ("PASS") = "Circle Test" enabled, but limited to "Display Circle" Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] Clear Circle Resets the "Display Circle" to its default configuration (unit circle; show border: off; limit to circle: off) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar...
  • Page 378 CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe Response Value Defines/shows the response value of the horizontal line. Tip: Use the R&S ZNA's drag and drop functionality to move the horizontal line to a particular position. The response value appears in the numeric entry field. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe...
  • Page 379 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Mkr <i> Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X Mkr <i> Arb. Response / Ref Mkr Arb. Response Gets/sets the response value (Y position) of an "Arbitrary" marker (see "Marker Mode"...
  • Page 380 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Markers remember their "Marker Props" while disabled (see Chapter 6.7.2, "Marker Props Tab", on page 381). The marker properties are definitely lost when the associ- ated trace is deleted. Tip: To disable a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete"...
  • Page 381 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m>...
  • Page 382 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Marker Format Defines the formatting of the active marker in the movable marker info field. For background information on marker formats, see "Marker Format" on page 82. "Default" means that the marker is formatted according to the related trace's Dflt Marker Frmt In "Arbitrary"...
  • Page 383 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool The marker can be moved freely inside the diagram, directly adjusting its X and Y coor- dinates. If in the current trace format the X axis represents the stimulus, the marker's stimulus value is adjusted accordingly. Otherwise the marker's stimulus value remains unchanged and is not shown in the Marker Info Field.
  • Page 384 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.3 Marker Search Tab Provides "Marker Search" functions that move the active marker to a (local) maximum or minimum of the active trace. The search operation can be restricted to a configurable range of stimulus values ("Search Range...").
  • Page 385 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute MINimum | MAXimum CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? Center = Marker "Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker" on page 398. Next Peak Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum in the search range, depending on the selected Peak Type.
  • Page 386 Marker Config... Opens the Marker Config Dialog. Spectrum = Marker This button is only available if the analyzer is equipped with software option R&S ZNA- K1 (see Chapter 5.7.1, "Spectrum Analyzer Mode", on page 186). It is only enabled if there is at least one marker on the active trace.
  • Page 387 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool It is possible to define search ranges for each recall set and assign them to the corre- sponding markers and the reference marker. Select Marker Selects the reference marker or one of the numbered markers that can be assigned to the trace.
  • Page 388 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Note: The marker Search Ranges are identical to the evaluation ranges for trace sta- tistics. For more information, see Chapter 6.5.7.2, "Evaluation Range Dialog", on page 343. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP Range Limit Lines On Displays or hides the range limit lines in the diagram area.
  • Page 389 The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the "Excursion" to a format-specific default value. For spectrum channels (R&S ZNA-K1), peak searches use an excursion of 6 dBm per default.
  • Page 390 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.4 Multiple Peak Tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic Marker Search Functions" on page 84. 6.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak Tab Max / Min Sets up to 10 markers to the highest maxima or lowest minima in the configured Eval...
  • Page 391 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool All Markers Off "All Off" on page 379. 6.7.4.2 Multiple Marker Config Dialog The "Multiple Marker Config" dialog allows you to configure the multiple peak searches for the active trace. Access: Trace – [Marker] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Search Config Same as selecting Max /...
  • Page 392 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.5 Target Search Tab The "Target Search" functions use markers to locate trace points with a specific response value ("Target Value"). The functions are unavailable if the active trace con- tains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Some of the "Target Search"...
  • Page 393 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Target Format Description Formula "Phase unwrap" Unwrapped phase of z comprising Ф(z) = φ (z) + 2k·360° the complete number of 360° phase rotations [°] "Real" Real part of z Re(z) = x "Imag" Imaginary part of z Im(z) = y "SWR"...
  • Page 394 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.6 Bandfilter Tab "Bandfilter" search allows you to search for trace segments with a bandpass or band- stop shape, and determine characteristic filter parameters. Background information Refer to "Bandfilter Search" on page 85. Bandfilter for arbitrary scalar traces "Bandfilter"...
  • Page 395 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Bandpass Ref to Max Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking. The located bandpass region is the tallest peak in the search range with a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 396 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BPASs CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:SEARch:BFILter:RESult[:STATe]:AREA Bandpass Ref to Mkr Activates the search for a bandpass region on the active trace and activates Tracking, starting at the position of the active marker. A bandpass region is the closest peak in the evaluation range that has a minimum excursion as specified by the "Bandwidth"...
  • Page 397 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE BSTop CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute BFILter Result Off Hides the movable info field with the results of a bandpass or a bandstop search and disables Tracking. The info field is displayed again (and tracking re-enabled) when a new "Bandfilter"...
  • Page 398 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.7 Set by Marker Tab The "Set by Marker" functions use the active marker to define the sweep range, scale the diagram and introduce an electrical length offset. The functions are unavailable if the active trace contains no markers (e.g. after "All Markers Off"). Examples Refer to Chapter 4.3.7.6, "Set by...
  • Page 399 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool Ref Val = Marker / Max = Marker / Min = Marker The following functions use the response value of the active marker to scale the y-axis of the diagram: ● "Ref Val = Marker" sets the reference value equal to the response value of the active marker, leaving the values of the vertical divisions ("Scale / Div") unchanged.
  • Page 400 ® GUI Reference R&S Marker Softtool 6.7.9 Marker Coupling Tab Allows you to set up and control marker coupling. Background information Refer to "Marker Coupling" on page 84. Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker Coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type"...
  • Page 401 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE Reset Marker Coupling Convenience function for disabling marker coupling and setting the Coupling Type "All" (default). Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] OFF CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ALL 6.8 Stimulus Softtool On the "Stimulus" softtool, you can access to the stimulus parameters of the active channel.
  • Page 402 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Power setting is also available on the "Power" tab. Start Frequency / Stop Frequency / Center Frequency / Span Frequency Defines the sweep range for non-segmented frequency sweeps. For a Lin Freq sweep, setting "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" or "Center Fre- quency"...
  • Page 403 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points for CW Mode sweeps. This value can also be set on the "Sweep Params" tab of the "Sweep"softtool (see "Number of Points" on page 415). Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:POINts CW Frequency...
  • Page 404 Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate][:AMPLitude] Source Step Att. This section is only available if the R&S ZNA is equipped with mechanical source step attenuators (see Chapter 5.7.19, "Source Step Attenuators", on page 225).
  • Page 405 "RF Off All Channels" also deactivates external generators, so you have to use the settings in the "Arb Frequency" tab of the Port Set- tings Dialog (with option R&S ZNA-K4). Remote command: OUTPut<Ch>[:STATe] Receiver Step Att.
  • Page 406 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Access: ● Channel – [Pwr Bw Avg] > "Power" > "ALC Config..." ● Port Settings Dialog > "Arbitrary Power" tab > "ALC Params" column Background information Chapter 5.1.5, "Automatic Level Control", on page 72. Initially, the "ALC Config"...
  • Page 407 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<Pt>:ALC:SOFFset ALC: Meas Port/ALC: Meas Receiver/ALC: Target Power Defines the received signal to be used for ALC, i.e. whose power the R&S ZNA tries to keep at a particular target level. For reference receivers (a waves), this "Target Power" is automatically set to the chan- nel base power.
  • Page 408 6.8.3 Time Domain X-Axis Tab If the active trace is a time domain trace, these settings define its stimulus axis. Time domain analysis requires option R&S ZNA-K2. If this option is not installed, the "Time Domain X-Axis" tab is hidden.
  • Page 409 ® GUI Reference R&S Stimulus Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.7.2, "Time Domain Analysis", on page 186 ● Chapter 6.5.5, "Time Domain Tab", on page 330 Figure 6-13: Stimulus > Time Domain X-Axis softtool tab left = Time representation right = Distance representation Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span...
  • Page 410 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool Distance Start / Distance Stop / Distance Center / Distance Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in distance representation (see "Time / Distance" on page 410). "Distance Start" and "Distance Stop" or "Distance Center" and "Distance Span" are alternative settings.
  • Page 411 Hz (n ≥ 0). Values exceeding the maximum bandwidth are rounded down. Hz, 7 · 10 The bandwidth range is 1 Hz to 1.5 MHz. Option R&S ZNA-K17 enables measurement bandwidths up to 30 MHz (see Chapter 5.7.8, "Increased IF Bandwidth 30 MHz",...
  • Page 412 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]BANDwidth[:RESolution] [SENSe<Ch>:]BWIDth[:RESolution] IF Filter (analog) Selects the analog IF signal path. "Normal" Standard high precision path "Wideband" Wideband path with 50 MHz lowpass filter "Narrowband" Narrowband path with 10.7 MHz bandpass filter Can only be selected if Direct IF Access is not used as...
  • Page 413 ® GUI Reference R&S Pwr Bw Avg Softtool Effects of sweep averaging, alternative settings An average over several sweeps reduces the influence of random effects in the mea- surement and therefore minimizes the noise level. The effect increases with the aver- age factor, however, obtaining an averaged result requires several sweeps and there- fore increases the measurement time.
  • Page 414 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "Reduce Noise": Cumulative moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "Real" and "Imag" formats and for polar diagrams. ● "Flatten Noise": Cumulative moving averages of the (linear) magnitude and phase values, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "dB Mag", "Phase", "Unwr.
  • Page 415 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value). The maximum depends on the analyzer type. Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value), the maximum is 100,001.
  • Page 416 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Size" is changed. The "Stop Frequency" value is changed as little as possible so that the condition "Freq Step Size" = ("Stop Frequency" – "Start Frequency") / ("Number of Points" – can be fulfilled. Changing the "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" modifies the "Freq Step Size".
  • Page 417 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool All Partial Meas'ments / First Partial Meas'ment Meas Delay is set to a value > 0, this setting allows you to define how the measure- ment delay is applied: ● If "All Partial Meas'ments" is selected, the delay time is added before each partial measurement.
  • Page 418 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool 6.10.2.1 Controls on the Sweep Type Tab Lin Freq In a linear frequency sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept in equidistant steps over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal generator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 419 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 420 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Segmented In a "Segmented" (linear) frequency sweep, the sweep range can be composed of sev- eral continuous frequency sub-ranges or single frequency points. The sub-ranges are termed sweep segments and are defined in the Define Segments Dialog.
  • Page 421 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Any generator power calibration or attenuation of the active source step attenuators is included. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POWer CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 6.8.1, "Stim- ulus Tab",...
  • Page 422 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool The time interval between two consecutive trigger pulses must not be smaller than the minimum measurement time per measurement point. See "Sweep Time / Auto" on page 416. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POINt Time "Time" sweeps, like CW Mode sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 423 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Pulse Profile This sweep type is only available, if the R&S ZNA is equipped with software option R&S ZNA-K7 Pulsed Measurements. Activates the pulse profile sweep defined in the Pulse Modulation Dialog. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE PULSe...
  • Page 424 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Tip: Overlapping limit line and ripple limit line segments are not displayed when a point-based x-axis is active; see Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition", on page 120. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:SEGMent:AXIS Reverse Reverses the direction of the sweep. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:REVerse Fast Power Sweep...
  • Page 425 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool The dialog contains a table to edit the individual segments of the sweep range. Use the Displayed Columns Dialog to select the columns to be displayed and edited. ● Sweep segments are allowed to overlap. ●...
  • Page 426 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:COUNt? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list. The added segment covers a possible frequency gap between the preceding seg- ment and the upper frequency limit of the analyzer.
  • Page 427 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Figure 6-14: Point List Import.../ Export... The buttons open standard dialogs to import/export sweep segment settings to/from an ASCII file (*.SegList). ● "Import..." replaces the current segment list by a sweep segment list loaded from a *.SegList file.
  • Page 428 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Displayed Columns Dialog The "Displayed Columns" dialog allows you to select the channel settings that can be defined per sweep segment. These settings are displayed in the Define Segments Dia- and in the "Point List" (opened via Show Point List...).
  • Page 429 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● "Meas Bandwidth" defines the IF filter bandwidth for each individual sweep seg- ment. See "Bandwidth" on page 411. ● "Selectivity" defines the selectivity of the IF filter used for each sweep segment. "IF Filter (digital) " on page 412.
  • Page 430 68. Output trigger If the R&S ZNA is equipped with the Trigger Board option R&S ZNA-K91, it provides four configurable output trigger signals that can be used to synchronize external devi- ces with the measurement. These signals are available at the rear panel connectors Trigger Out A to D.
  • Page 431 In "External" trigger mode, the measurement is triggered by an external 5 V TTL signal, applied to one of the following rear panel connectors: – BNC connectors Trigger In A to D (requires trigger board R&S ZNA-B91) – Pin 2 of the User Port connector "Source"...
  • Page 432 Note: The trigger events must be adjusted to the triggered measurement sequence. If the analyzer receives a trigger event while the last sequence is still running, the R&S ZNA skips the trigger event and generates a message. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 433 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool If it observes lost trigger events, the analyzer increments a dedicated counter and records the events in a dedicated log, which is updated after every sweep. Use the clickable link in the message popup to open the Lost Trigger Tab of the system "Info"...
  • Page 434 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Figure 6-15: Example of a multiple trigger configuration The table in the "Trigger Manager" dialog contains several editable (white) or non-edit- able (gray) columns. All settings are analogous to the general trigger settings in the Trigger Tab.
  • Page 435 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Trigger Out connectors A to D are provided by the optional Trigger Board. If this hard- ware option is not installed, it is not possible to generate outgoing trigger signals. In particular, the "Trigger Out Manager" dialog is not available in this case. Sequence Selects the sequence to be indicated at the related Trigger Out "Connector".
  • Page 436 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: on page 1325 TRIGger:CHANnel<Ch>:AUXiliary<n>:DURation Position If pulses are used as trigger out signals (see "Signal Type" on page 435), the pulses can either indicate the "Start" or "End" position of the related sweep event (see "Sequence"...
  • Page 437 "All Channels Continuous": The R&S ZNA continuously repeats the sweeps in all channels. ● "All Channels on Hold": The R&S ZNA performs single sweeps, according to the channel-specific number of "Sweeps". These actions are only available for the DEFAULT Remote Language).
  • Page 438 ® GUI Reference R&S Sweep Softtool Sweep Controller Activates/deactivates the (resizable) "Sweep Info" dialog, which displays the current sweep stage. The "Sweep Info" dialog is particularly useful for long duration sweeps that are executed in single sweep mode: by observing the dialog, it is easy to realize when the sweep is done.
  • Page 439 "SMARTerCal". Access: Channel – [Cal] 6.11.1 Start Cal Tab The "Start Cal" tab provides access to all functions for automatic or manual calibration. Calibration of the R&S ZNA is a fully guided process. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 440 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Background information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.5, "Calibration", on page 132 ● Chapter 5.5.5, "Automatic Calibration", on page 151 ● Chapter 5.5.6, "Scalar Power Calibration", on page 158 ● Chapter 5.5.7, "SMARTerCal", on page 164 ●...
  • Page 441 Scalar mixer ✓ (required) 1x PUOSM (R&S ZNA-K4) 2x POSM (see screenshot above) IMD (R&S ZNA-K4) ✓ (required) "P-Ref Receiver" for UT and LT port, if on VNA, "P-Trans Norm" between UT and IF port Vector mixer "PUOSM Scalar Vector Mixer"...
  • Page 442 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.1.2 Controls on the Start Cal Tab All controls on the "Start Cal" are buttons and each of them opens a dialog or dock widget wizard. The buttons are grouped in three sections. ● "Cal Active Channel"...
  • Page 443 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The "Scalar Power Cal" button opens the Power Cal Wizard, which allows you to perform "Ref. Receiver", "Meas. Receiver" and scalar source power ("Source Flat- ness") calibrations for the current channel. Guided Calibration... Use "Start... (Guided)" to open the Guided Calibration Wizard that allows you to config- ure and run a set of calibrations efficiently.
  • Page 444 Cal Softtool For complex calibrations, the wizard proceeds in several steps ("Next"/"Back" buttons at the bottom of the dock widget). On "Apply", the R&S ZNA calculates the system error corrections and/or power corrections from the acquired data and applies the result to the related channels.
  • Page 445 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Background and related information ● Refer to Chapter 5.5, "Calibration", on page 132 for background information ● For the description of the source flatness and source power cal steps, see the des- ription of the Power Cal Wizard.
  • Page 446 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep The dock widget below the diagrams shows the calibrated ports and standards and vis- ualizes the measurement progress. Use the buttons representing the calibration standards to start the corresponding cali- bration sweeps. If "Show Cal Kit Label"...
  • Page 447 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Don't Show this Dialog Again" has the same effect as disabling "Show Cal Kit Label" . A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data of a standard has been acquired successfully. A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed.
  • Page 448 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Incompatibilities between the selected calibration type, the standards and the channel settings can cause the calibration to be inaccurate. The analyzer auto-detects potential sources of errors and displays appropriate, self-explanatory notice boxes. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete...
  • Page 449 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 2. If a SMARterCal is performed: a) Replace the calibration unit by the power meter. b) Start the power calibration sweep. The upper part of the screen displays power trace diagrams and the lower part dis- plays the power meter connection.
  • Page 450 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep, each diagram contains a single S-parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard. The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors: If the correct standard type is measured, and everything is properly connected, then the measured trace is expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 451 Performs the "Detect Port Assignment" and "Start Cal Sweep" functions, one after the other. Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNA (with a little help from the attached calibra- tion unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one.
  • Page 452 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:SAVE [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:POWer 6.11.1.4 Calibration Setup Dialog Allows you to configure the calibration setup of the available channels. Access: ● Channel – [Cal] > "Start Cal" > "Cal Active Channel" – "Configure/Start Calibration" ● Calibrate All Dialog >...
  • Page 453 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed if one of the following hap- pens: ● One of the selected calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values.
  • Page 454 If a calibration kit is changed, the R&S ZNA automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type. Import Cal Kit... to add new kits to the list.
  • Page 455 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations. See "Authentication" on page 483. See also Chapter 5.5.5.3, "Characterization of Calibration Units", on page 155.
  • Page 456 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Figure 6-19: Define Calibration dialog: automatic calibration The green arrow symbols give a preview of the type and the number of calibration sweeps involved: ● Curved arrows (example: "Refl Norm Open") denote one or more reflection mea- surements at each port.
  • Page 457 The test port connectors are automatically set according to the connector type of the selected calibration unit port. "Detect Port Assignment" starts a procedure by which the R&S ZNA (with a little help from the attached calibration unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one.
  • Page 458 See Chapter 6.11.2.3, "Characterize Cal Unit Dialog", on page 482. By default, the R&S ZNA uses the last generated cal unit char- acterization. Tip: If the characterization wizard is password-protected, the "Characterization" button is unavailable. Use this functionality to prevent inadvertent activation of inappropriate characterizations.
  • Page 459 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool See also Chapter 5.5.5.3, "Characterization of Calibration Units", on page 155. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CONFigure SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Query further cal unit properties: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:DATE? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Mixer/IMD/Harmonics Tab Defines channel-specific settings for mixer and intermodulation (IMD) measurements. Calibration Mixer Settings Defines the properties of the calibration mixer and the related calibration.
  • Page 460 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Keep "Fast Cal Interp. Meas" checked to stick to the faster calibration method, that does not increase the number of sweep points and uses interpolation if necessary. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:CORRection:IMODulation:METHod Harmonic Orders to Calibrate If a harmonics measurement is active in the current channel, this section allows you to specify the harmonic orders to be calibrated in the current channel.
  • Page 461 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.1.5 Power Cal Wizard The "Power Cal" wizard displays a single screen, showing the current source and receive ports. It allows you to perform "Ref. Receiver", "Meas. Receiver" and scalar source power ("Source Flatness") calibrations, based on the current power calibration settings (see Chapter 6.11.3, "Pwr Cal Settings Tab",...
  • Page 462 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Screen Elements From top to bottom, the screen consists of the following elements. Calibration Sweep Diagram The calibration sweep diagram in the upper part of the screen shows the progress of the calibration and the accuracy of a completed calibration ("Verification"). The diagram is scaled in "dB Mag"...
  • Page 463 Flatness" calibration can be performed. ● If a "SMARTerCal" is active, additional receiver power calibrations are not allowed and the R&S ZNA only offers the possibility to perform "Source Flatness" calibra- tions of the related test ports: Chapter 5.5.7.3, "Combining SMARTerCal with Scalar Power Calibration",...
  • Page 464 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool In the converter configuration above, P1 and P2 drive the RF IN ports of converter 1 and 2, respectively, and the Converter LO port drives the LO IN ports of both con- verters. If a converter port is not configured to use leveling data, and a source flatness cali- bration is made at both the RF IN and the converter port, then the flatness cal at...
  • Page 465 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The power calibration state is indicated in the trace list, see Chapter 5.5.6.3, "Power Calibration Labels", on page 162. Use the functions in the Chapter 6.11.4, "Use Cal Tab", on page 494 to activate, deactivate, or store power calibrations. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection[:ACQuire] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:ACQuire...
  • Page 466 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep Starts the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and closes the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 160. Open the Pwr Cal Settings Tab if you wish to modify the calibration procedure.
  • Page 467 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool left: = source and meas. port identical right = source and meas. port different Port Overview The dialog shows all receiver ports of the network analyzer. The selected port is dis- played with the current cal power settings (see Chapter 6.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config Dialog", on page 489);...
  • Page 468 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweep for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 161. No additional calibration settings are needed. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer<PhyPt>:ACQuire [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:POWer:DATA...
  • Page 469 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 160. Use the Pwr Cal Settings Tab"Pwr Cal Settings"...
  • Page 470 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Tap the Add + Modify button to open the Calibration Setup Dialog, which allows you to add calibration definitions or modify them. Existing definitions can be selectively deleted. Use the checkboxes in the "Enable" column to enable/disable the related calibration definition.
  • Page 471 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Save/Cancel Saves the channel calibration definitions to the current setup or discards unsaved mod- ifications. 6.11.1.7 Guided Calibration Wizard The "Guided Calibration" wizard lets you calibrate a set of channels using the calibra- tion methods the firmware proposes for the related measurements. If a calibration unit is connected, it is automatically used.
  • Page 472 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool RF power will be switched off for all ports until you proceed with "OK", which will termi- nate the "Guided Calibration" wizard. If you cancel one of those wizards, you are asked if you want to skip just the current calibration, or end the guided calibration as a whole.
  • Page 473 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool ● "Active Channel" if you only want to calibrate the active channel ● "All Channels" if you want to calibrate all channels in the current recall set ● "Selected Channels" if you want to calibrate only certain channels 6.11.2 Cal Devices Tab Provides access to all functions for calibration kit management and cal unit characteri- zation.
  • Page 474 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.2.1 Cal Connector Types Dialog The "Cal Connector Types" dialog displays and modifies the list of available connector types. Cal connector types must be selected in accordance with the connectors of the measured DUT. Access: Channel –...
  • Page 475 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Char. Imp. The characteristic impedance or reference impedance ("Char. Imp.") Z for the connec- tors is a critical value that has an impact on various parameter conversions. Z enters into: ● The calculation of the S-parameters for the calibration standards associated with the connector type, if they are derived from a circuit model (see "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards Dialog"...
  • Page 476 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Add / Delete Adds or deletes a user-defined connector type. The parameters of a user-defined con- nector type can be modified in the table. Note: Deleted/Missing Connector Types. ● Deleting a connector type also deletes all calibration or adapter kits assigned to it. ●...
  • Page 477 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Controls in the Calibration Kits Dialog Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Available Cal Kits Displays the cal kits for the selected...
  • Page 478 The buttons below the "Connector Type" list are used to store cal kit data to a file and to reload previously stored cal kit files. By default, calibration kit files are stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Calibration directory; Chapter 5.5.2.4, "Cal Kit Files",...
  • Page 479 ".s1p File" and ".s2p File" define whether the characteristics of the standard are described by a Touchstone file rather than by a circuit model from which the R&S ZNA can calculate the S-parameters. See "Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File..."...
  • Page 480 Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File... Opens a file selection dialog where you can select a Touchstone file containing the reflection or transmission S-parameters for the standard. The R&S ZNA uses the imported S-parameters rather than the circuit model to characterize the standard, if ".s1p File"/".s2p File"...
  • Page 481 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The diagram in the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog depends on the standard type for which the dialog was opened. Moreover, it is possible to modify the circuit model using the buttons in the upper right of the dialog. Offset Parameters The entries in the upper part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards"...
  • Page 482 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Load Parameters The entries in the lower part of the "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog specify the load parameters for a particular calibration standard describing its terminal impedance. The circuit model for the load consists of capacitance C which is connected in parallel to an inductance L and a resistance R, both connected in series.
  • Page 483 Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit Dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZNA auto-detects all calibration units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connected, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
  • Page 484 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The properties of the selected characterization are shown below the list. "Delete" dele- tes the selected characterization file; "Start Characterization..." opens the Characteri- zation Wizard to create a characterization. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Characterization Wizard The "Characterization"...
  • Page 485 "Take OSM" starts a calibration sweep for the related port. "Take All OSM and Through" initiates a series of calibration sweeps; the R&S ZNA acquires a full set of one-port and two-port data. The latter is required for the transmission normalizations and for a "One Path Two Ports"...
  • Page 486 Cal Softtool Next Proceeds to Step 2: Save Characterization Data . Next is available when the R&S ZNA has acquired characterization data for a single port. Step 2: Save Characterization Data Saves the characterization data to the calibration unit. Figure 6-20: Save Characterization Data...
  • Page 487 R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.3 Pwr Cal Settings Tab Gives access to all functions for power meter and power calibration data handling (transmission coefficients). Power calibration of the R&S ZNA is a fully menu-guided process. Efficient power calibration procedure ● For standard applications, open the "Start Cal" tab and select "Scalar Power Cal" –...
  • Page 488 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ● "Cal Power...": see Chapter 6.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config Dialog", on page 489 ● "Transm. Coefficients...": see Chapter 6.11.3.3, "Power Meter Transmission Coeffi- cients Dialog", on page 492 ●...
  • Page 489 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Power Meter": Use a power meter for the calibration of the reference receiver and the flatness calibration. For external generators and the optional Chapter 5.7.16, "LO Out", on page 224 port, a power meter must be used. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:COLLect:METHod Power Meter...
  • Page 490 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The diagram in the center of the dialog visualizes the settings and results below. Port Cal Power Allows you to define (port-specific) power levels for source power calibrations. Port Overview ← Port Cal Power The dialog shows all source ports of the network analyzer.
  • Page 491 SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:GENerator<Gen>:LEVel:OFFSet Reference Receiver Cal Power Defines the source power the R&S ZNA uses to perform the first calibration sweep of the source power calibration. In this first sweep, the power meter reading is used to calibrate the reference receiver of the calibrated port. The following calibration sweeps are based solely on the reference receiver (see "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 492 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool By default, the "Reference Receiver Cal Power" is set to the resulting Port Cal Power. However, the accuracy of the source power calibration depends on the power meter's measurement accuracy. Therefore it is advantageous to select a "Reference Receiver Cal Power"...
  • Page 493 Transmission coefficients are interpolated between the frequency points and extrapolated, if necessary. If no transmission coefficient is defined at all, the R&S ZNA assumes a 0 dB attenua- tion across the entire frequency range. This assumption is equivalent to an ideal through connection or selecting "No Coefficients"...
  • Page 494 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>[: DUMMy] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:CORRection:TCOefficient:DELete<ListNo>: Get Trace... Opens a selection box containing all traces in the active recall set. The "dB Mag" val- ues of the selected trace are used to define the transmission coefficients. Notice that if you combine different channels with different sweep points, the analyzer possibly has to interpolate or extrapolate the transmission coefficients.
  • Page 495 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool 6.11.4.1 Controls on the Use Cal Tab The buttons in the "Use Cal" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Scalar Power Cal" – "Active Power Cals...": Active Power Cals Dialog ● "Manage Cals" – "Cal Manager...": See Calibration Manager Dialog User Cal Active Activates or deactivates the system error correction in the active channel.
  • Page 496 Loads and activates the recall set for which the last calibration was performed. If the last calibrated setup is already active, nothing is changed. The calibrated setups are automatically stored in the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Calibration\ RecallSets directory. A message box pops up if the directory is empty, e.g. because no calibration was performed yet.
  • Page 497 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool All possible power calibrations can be performed from the Power Cal Wizard. Port Overview Shows all source ports together with their possible power calibrations. Unavailable cali- brations (i.e. calibrations that have not been performed yet) are grayed out. If external generators are configured, they appear as additional source ports G1 ...
  • Page 498 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool In the converter configuration above, P1 and P2 drive the RF IN ports of converter 1 and 2, respectively, and the Converter LO port drives the LO IN ports of both convert- ers. If the source flatness calibration at the converter port is enabled, then the flatness cal at the RF IN port is disabled (and grayed out).
  • Page 499 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
  • Page 500 Pool / Delete from Pool The "Pool" table shows all correction data sets <CalGroup_name>.cal in the direc- tory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Calibration\Data. The name of a pool data set can be modified directly in the corresponding table cell. "Delete from Pool" deletes a cal group file from the pool. Note however, that calibra- tions being used in any of the opened recall sets cannot be deleted.
  • Page 501 The controls on the "METAS Cal" tab allow you to set up the instrument for real-time measurement uncertainty analysis. It is only visible if option R&S ZNA-K50 and METAS VNA Tools (version 2.2.3 or higher) are installed on the instrument.
  • Page 502 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool METAS Cal Active After a successful METAS calibration, this checkbox enables or disables the uncer- tainty calculation for the related channel. ● If enabled, measurement results and uncertainties are calculated by METAS VNA Tools. ●...
  • Page 503 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Export Data to METAS VNA Tools Saves the current state of the METAS VNA Tools project that is created with the METAS calibration. The exported ZIP file also contains the characterizations of the standards that were used for calibration and verification.
  • Page 504 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Only calibration types supported by METAS VNA Tools are available. Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ●...
  • Page 505 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool "Normal"/"Nor- The sample detector without/with (automatic) averaging. This is the mal with AVG" default detector for all other channels, if Auto Averaging is disabled/ enabled. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:DETector [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AVERage Step 2: Connectors and Cal Kits Connector/Gender Specifies the connector and gender of the ports selected in Step 1: Ports and...
  • Page 506 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Cal Kit/Uncertainty Allows you to specify the cal kits to be used for the selected ports. For meaningful uncertainty calculations, use a cal kit that is characterized with uncertainties. Regular cal kits (without uncertainties) are also offered for selection. For these cal kits, zero uncertainty is assumed, which results in an unrealistic METAS calibration quality.
  • Page 507 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Start Proceeds to Step 3: Calibration. If the configuration is not plausible, a warning is dis- played: Step 3: Calibration In step 3, the calibration is performed. The procedure is the same as for regular cali- brations of the selected type (see Chapter 6.11.1.3, "Calibration Wizard",...
  • Page 508 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Verification Kit Allows you to specify the verification kits to be used for the related ports. Verification standards are characterized individually, including uncertainties. So initially no verification kits are defined. Use Import Verification Kit... to import your verification kit.
  • Page 509 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool The imported verification kit is assigned to the selected Connector type; the name of the ZIP file is used as the verification kit name. The name of a characterization file inside the zip container must indicate ●...
  • Page 510 ® GUI Reference R&S Cal Softtool Save Verification Data Same as Export Data to METAS VNA Tools. The exported ZIP file now also contains the METAS verification configuration, and the verification measurement data obtained so far. 6.11.5.4 METAS Reconnection Dialog While a METAS calibration is active, you can notify the METAS VNA Tools about addi- tional reconnections and/or cable movements.
  • Page 511 For uniqueness, a timestamp is always appended. 6.12 Channel Config Softtool The "Channel Config" functions select, create and delete channels, configure the source and receive ports of the R&S ZNA, and optimize the measurement process. Access: Channel – [Channel Config] key 6.12.1 Channels Tab Allows you to create and delete channels, to modify the channel state, and to select a channel as the active channel.
  • Page 512 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool 6.12.1.1 Controls on the Channels Tab The buttons in the "Channels" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Channel Manager...": see Chapter 6.12.1.2, "Channel Manager Dialog", on page 514 Active Channel Selects an arbitrary channel of the active recall set as the active channel. This function is disabled if the current recall set contains only one channel.
  • Page 513 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Tips: ● To create a channel and a trace with default settings and to display the trace in a new diagram area, use New Channel + Diagram. ● Add Trace to create a trace in the active channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine...
  • Page 514 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] Channel On Toggles the measurement state of the Active Channel. Remote command: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] Fixture Simulator The "Fixture Simulator" switch deactivates or activates the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel. When "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 515 "Arb" and the selected stimulus axis are displayed in the chan- nel line. The arbitrary port configuration is part of the "Frequency Conversion Measurements" option R&S ZNA-K4. If this option is not equipped, the "Port Config" Tab is not availa- ble. Background information Refer to Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion...
  • Page 516 The "Port Settings" dialog is an example of a Multi-channel Setup Dialog. For the selected channel, it configures the source and receiver ports of the R&S ZNA for arbi- trary frequencies, source and receiver levels. Furthermore, it gives convenient access to the stimulus settings, and allows you to define and configure alternative input and output paths related to R&S ZNAxx-B16 and...
  • Page 517 Support", on page 215 Arb Frequency Tab Defines port-specific frequencies (arbitrary mode) and other port-specific source set- tings. Arbitrary mode requires software option R&S ZNA-K4, seeChapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 198. If any of the port frequencies are changed from their preset values, the frequency con- version mode is activated on pressing "Apply"...
  • Page 518 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-21: Arb Frequency tab, default columns Active frequency converter ports are displayed with their RF IN and LO IN compo- nents. Non-editable table cells In addition to the test ports ("Port" or "Conv"), the source ports include all configured External Generators ("Source Gen"), and the LO Out...
  • Page 519 This cell is only enabled, if the analyzer is equipped with option R&S ZNA-K4. For fre- quency converter ports (with option R&S ZNA-K8), the formulas for the RF IN and "LO IN" components are derived from the converter settings and hence are read-only.
  • Page 520 520. In the default configuration, the source fre- quency range is used. For frequency converter ports (with option R&S ZNA-K8), the formulas for the RF IN and "LO IN" components are derived from the converter settings and hence are read- only.
  • Page 521 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Current Formula Apart from the current Frequency Conversion Formula, the analyzer firmware main- tains a list of named, user-defined formulas. ● "Add Formula to List..." adds the current frequency conversion formula to this list. ●...
  • Page 522 SOURce<Ch>:FREQuency<PhyPt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary:EFRequency<Gen> [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency<Pt>:CONVersion:ARBitrary [SENSe<Ch>:]FREQuency:CONVersion:ARBitrary:PMETer<Pmtr> Arbitrary Power Tab Configures the source ports of the R&S ZNA for port-specific powers. Channel base power After a Reset, all source port powers are set to the channel base power P . For power sweeps, P corresponds to the unmodified sweep range.
  • Page 523 404. El. Source Att. The R&S ZNA comes with an electronic step attenuator in the source path of each port. You can either select one of the possible attenuation factors (0 dB, 20 dB, 40 dB) or select "Auto" to let the firmware decide (default).
  • Page 524 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Enables/disables automatic level control (ALC) for the current channel. Same functionality as "ALC ON" on the Power Tab or in the ALC Config Dialog. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer:ALC:CSTate ALC Params Displays the current ALC parameters. Click on the table cell to open the ALC Config Dialog that allows you to (enable and) configure automatic level control (ALC) for the...
  • Page 525 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Input/Output Tab This tab gives access the settings for the optional Direct Generator/Receiver Access Chapter 5.7.20, "Direct IF Access", on page 225. If a port is configured as converter port, all its "Input / Output" settings are derived from the settings in the Converter Configuration Dialog.
  • Page 526 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:DIRectaccess SOURce<Ch>:PATH<Pt>:DIRectaccess [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:MEASurement:DIRectaccess? [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:REFerence:DIRectaccess? [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:MEASurement:IFSWitch? Rear Out If checked, the Direct IF Access connectors on the rear panel are used as (additional) output. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:IFSWitch [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:MEASurement:IFSWitch? [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:REFerence:IFSWitch? Auto Determine IF Out This checkbox is only enabled, if Rear Out is used.
  • Page 527 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:IFRequency [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:MEASurement:IFRequency? [SENSe<Ch>:]PATH<Pt>:REFerence:IFRequency? Frequency Result Shows the frequency resulting from the from Rear IF Frequency configuration. Common Controls Modified "Port Settings" take effect on "Apply" or "OK". Use "Cancel" to discard possi- ble changes.
  • Page 528 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Displayed Columns Dialog To reduce complexity and to focus on particular settings, you can limit the columns to be displayed in the configuration tables. This possibility is particularly suitable for cus- tom tabs, which allow you to display an arbitrary subset of the available port settings. Figure 6-22: Displayed Columns dialog (custom tab) For the predefined tabs, only the "General"...
  • Page 529 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-23: Stimulus Dialog: Linear Frequency Sweep Figure 6-24: Stimulus Dialog: Power Sweep Except for the "Enter & Display" properties, all these parameters can also be set in the Sweep Softtool. Depending on the channel's Sweep Type, a different set of parameters can be modified.
  • Page 530 6.12.2.3 Define Parallel Measurement Dialog With a 4-port R&S ZNA, you can measure multiple DUTs (or multiple paths of a single DUT) in parallel. The "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog allows you to configure these DUTs and to declare the connections between physical VNA ports and DUT ports.
  • Page 531 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Figure 6-25: Define Parallel Measurement ● Modified settings are not applied unless the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog is closed with the "OK" button. ● On "OK", any pre-existing logical port configuration is overwritten. ●...
  • Page 532 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:GROup:COUNt? SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:NAME Balanced Ports Tab The "Balanced Ports" tab of the "Define Parallel Measurement" dialog allows you to define the balanced ports of the configured DUTs. In order to modify the balanced port configuration, proceed as follows: 1.
  • Page 533 ® GUI Reference R&S Channel Config Softtool To get access to the "Frequency Offset" configuration, set "Parallel Measurement" to "Enabled") and activate the "Frequency Offset" tab. It is essential to perform the calibration with the same "Frequency Offset" settings as for the actual measurement;...
  • Page 534 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool In particular, activation is rejected if: ● the start frequency is < 31 MHz ● the measurement bandwidth is > 100 kHz ● the resulting frequency offset (i.e. the minimum frequency offset, rounded to a mul- tiple of the current frequency step size) would be too high ●...
  • Page 535 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool 6.13.1.1 Controls on the Mode Tab Driving Mode Determines the order of partial measurements and sweeps. ● In "Auto" mode, the analyzer optimizes the display update: Fast sweeps are per- formed in "Alternated" mode, slower sweeps in "Chopped" mode. ●...
  • Page 536 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool eliminate known spurious components in the input signal that can distort the measure- ment, especially in the low frequency range. ● In "Auto" mode, the analyzer auto-selects the LO frequency, depending on the receiver (RF) frequency and the test port. This mode systematically avoids known spurious signals if no frequency conversion occurs in the test setup.
  • Page 537 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool The spurious signal can be eliminated by dividing the sweep range into two segments with different LO settings: ● In the low-frequency segment ranging up to the center frequency of the bandpass filter, the frequency of the local oscillator is set to LO < RF. This setting ensures that the spurious signal b' is not measured at port 2.
  • Page 538 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SLAMode Use Primed Waves If a (two-tone) Embedded LO Mixer Group Delay Measurements is active, in addition to a and b the analyzer can provide "primed" wave quantities a', b'. The unprimed wave quantities correspond to the lower tone, the primed wave quantities correspond to the upper tone.
  • Page 539 [SENSe<Ch>:]POWer:GAINcontrol:ALL 6.13.2 Pulse Mod Tab Gives access to the pulse generation, pulse modulation, and pulse profile measure- ment functionality of the R&S ZNA. As outlined in the table below, the related functionality is enabled by several hardware and software options.
  • Page 540 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool 6.13.2.1 Controls on the Pulse Mod Tab The "Pulse Mod..." button opens the Pulse Modulation Dialog. Pulse Generator Enables or disables pulse generation. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>[:STATe] Set all Traces to AVG Detector Uses the AVG detector for all traces in the current channel. See "Detector"...
  • Page 541 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Schematics The "Schematics" button in the "Pulse Modulation" dialog opens a separate window that visualizes the pulse generation and modulation logic. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 542 PuMo In/Out connectors. The latter requires the optional trig- ger board R&S ZNA-B91. ● If the optional trigger board R&S ZNA-B91 is available, the internal pulse generator signals can also be provided to external pulse modulators. –...
  • Page 543 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool For unsuitable combinations of the pulse and measurement settings, the firmware dis- plays a warning above the diagram, indicating the detection type and a possible desen- sitization loss of sensitivity of the measurement. Master Pulse Settings Pulse Gen.
  • Page 544 Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PERiod Basic Pulse Generator Settings If option R&S ZNA-K7 is not available, the port-related pulse generators can only oper- ate at a fixed duty cycle. Fixed Duty Cycle/Duty Cycle If "Fixed Duty Cycle" is enabled, the analyzer automatically adjusts the pulse width of the the port-related pulse generators to keep the "Duty Cycle"...
  • Page 545 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Coupled Settings Couples the settings of the port pulse generators, i.e. enforces identical settings for all ports. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:COUPled[:STATe] Pulse Delay/Pulse Width Defines the delay and width of the internally generated pulses. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:DELay [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:WIDTh [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:DELay...
  • Page 546 [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:GENerator<Id>:TRAin:SEGMent<Seg>:STOP Pulse Modulator Control Allows you to control the internal pulse modulators (with options R&S ZNAxx-B4y) and external pulse modulators via PuMo In/Out and Trigger Out (with option R&S ZNA- B91). Pulse Modulator Control If the R&S ZNA is equipped with the...
  • Page 547 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool PuMo In If external Pulse Modulator Control is enabled, this setting allows you to select between positive or negative polarity of the "PuMo In" signal. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]PULSe:PORT<Pt>:EXTernal:INPut:INVerted[:STATe] Trig. Out Allows you to enable/disable pulse modulator control via the respective "Trig. Out". Note that a Trigger Out that has been previously configured to indicate sweeps, seg- ments or measurement points for this channel, cannot be used for pulse generation.
  • Page 548 The "Source Coherence" tab allows you to configure source signals with defined phase. Source coherent signals require the "Phase Coherent Source Control" option R&S ZNA-K6. If this option is not equipped, the "Source Coherence" tab is not availa- ble. 6.13.3.1 Controls on the Source Coherence Tab The "Source Coherence..."...
  • Page 549 ® GUI Reference R&S Mode Softtool Source Coherence On Same as Source Coh. On on the "Source Coherence" softtool tab. Use Port Match and Calibration Allows you to select between a raw (unchecked), or an optimized phase control, apply- ing port match corrections and.calibration (checked, default). If checked, the phase values are relative to a common zero.
  • Page 550 ● "Port Power Offset" on page 491 True Differential Mode The "True Differential Mode" checkbox is only active, if option R&S ZNA-K61 is instal- led and if at least one balanced port is configured (see Topology (graphical button)). It enables/disables True Differential Mode.
  • Page 551 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:LPORt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:STARt SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:STOP Topology (graphical button) Visualizes the logical port configuration. If the Balanced Ports Dialog is not already in the background, you can open it from here. 6.14 Offset Embed Softtool The "Offset Embed"...
  • Page 552 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-26: Offset Embed dock widget: Overview (Calculation Flow) Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function. A green LED on a but- ton indicates that the corresponding deembedding/embedding function is active. If the "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 553 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:COMPensation[:STATe] Reset Offsets The "Reset Offsets" button resets the length and loss parameters for all ports to their default values. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>[:STATe] All Offsets On / All Offsets Off Activates/deactivates the length and loss compensation for all ports. Use the checkboxes in the Active"Active"...
  • Page 554 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] File Name 1 / Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected (see Single Ended Tab).
  • Page 555 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Add / Delete Allows you to define the "Port Sets" to whom a deembedding or embedding network can be assigned. The "Add" button opens the "Define Port Set" dialog that allows you to define an addi- tional port set, comprising two or more physical ports.
  • Page 556 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side). However, it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an "Increasing Port Sequence", i.e. that the low port numbers are on the VNA side.
  • Page 557 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Balanced Tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured de-/ embeding for the related balanced port (i.e.
  • Page 558 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Access: Overview Panel > "Ground Loop" For the "1-Port Data" network type, the required touchstone file can also be selected from here ("..."). This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop Tab softtool tab.
  • Page 559 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.1.7 Impedance Renormalization Panel This panel provides alternative access to the reference impedance settings (see "Ref- erence Impedance Tab" on page 254). Access: Overview Panel > "Impedance Renor." Active The "Active" flags are inversely related to the Use Default flags of the logical port con- figuration (see...
  • Page 560 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Differential Match Tab softtool tab. Refer to its description of this softtool tab for background information, parameters and additional remote commands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured differential match embedding (i.e.
  • Page 561 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.2.1 Controls on the Offset Tab The "Fixture Compensation..." button opens the Fixture Compensation Dialog. Overview This button is available on all "Offset Embed" softtool tabs. It opens the Overview Panel in the Offset Embed Dock Widget.
  • Page 562 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool sion parameter. For a numeric example, see Chapter 5.6.1.6, "Application and Effect of Offset Parameters ", on page 172. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>[:TIME] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:ELENgth [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:EDELay<PhyPt>:DISTance Permittivity / Velocity Factor Defines the permittivity (ε ) and velocity factor of the dielectric in the transmission line between the reference plane and the DUT.
  • Page 563 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool If "Adjust Time Gate" is on, the time gate is moved to left (right) when the offset-correc- ted reference plane is moved to the right (left). Its absolute position remains fixed. With this setting, it is possible, e.g., to keep the time gate at the position of the antenna con- nector while the antenna is measured at different length offsets.
  • Page 564 172. Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter[:STATe] [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:DFComp[:STATe]? Prompt for Each Port Determines how the R&S ZNA performs the sweeps for a given termination type (Open and/or Short; see "Measurement Type" on page 564). ● If unchecked, it performs the sweeps for Open/Short without interruption, implicitly assuming that all ports are terminated accordingly ●...
  • Page 565 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-28: Measure Fixture dialog: Auto Length (and Loss) To acquire the necessary data, proceed as indicated in the information area. With Prompt for Each Port disabled, "Take" acquires data for all selected ports in one go.
  • Page 566 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Table 6-6: Direct Compensation data Prompt for Each Port File Type Description disabled One csv trace file per standard, containing reflection traces for all selected ports; see Chap- ter 5.4.2.2, "ASCII (*.csv) Files", on page 131 enabled One 1-port Touchstone file per...
  • Page 567 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool The "Fixture Compensation..." button opens the Fixture Compensation Dialog. Overview "Overview" on page 561. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent loss parameters for all ports. Remote command: The <PhyPt> numeric suffix in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:... commands identifies the physical port.
  • Page 568 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Auto Length and Loss Determines the length offset and one-way loss parameters for the receive port of the active trace. See Chapter 5.6.1.4, "Auto Length and Loss", on page 170. Note: ● If "Auto Length and Loss" is used with a line connected to a test port, the end of the line should be left open.
  • Page 569 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Figure 6-30: Offset Embed > Single Ended softtool left = 2 port data file selected for deembedding right = lumped element model selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 570 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Network The graphical list contains all available 2-port networks: ● symbol selects "no network" and disables single-ended de-/embedding. ● The "2-Port Data" network is defined by means of an s2p file (see Select File...).
  • Page 571 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt> Fixture Tool The "Fixture Tool" section is only available for deembedding 2-port data networks. Its controls allow you to select and run a third-party fixture modeling tool (see Chap- ter 6.14.5, "Fixture Modeling Dialog", on page 571) and to use its results for single-...
  • Page 572 The calculated sNp file(s) can then be used to deembed the DUT at selected port(s). All files generated by actions in this dialog are stored in the directory C:\Users\Public \Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Embedding. The current implementation assumes symmetrical lead-ins and lead-outs. 6.14.5.1 Common Controls on the Dialog...
  • Page 573 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Timestamp Filenames If checked, the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fix- ture" files are prefixed with the current date and time. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:REName Reset to Default Restores the default settings of the selected fixture modeling tool. This comprises: ●...
  • Page 574 Starts the coupon measurement at the Active ports. The display will change to show all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA \Embedding. Coupon Type "1x Open, 1x Short" (ISD only) the measurement proceeds in two steps: one for the "1x Open"...
  • Page 575 Measure Starts the measurement of DUT + Test Fixture at the Active ports. The display will change to show all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA \Embedding. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure Active Before starting to Measure, use these checkboxes to indicate the physical ports to which DUT + test fixture are connected.
  • Page 576 575) The resulting Touchstone files (S parameters of the lead-ins, the lead-outs, and the de- embedded DUT) are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA \Embedding. If result files with the same names already exist, you will be asked whether you want to rename or overwrite them.
  • Page 577 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Note: ● If there are any errors in running the fixture deembedding tool, an error log of the tool is automatically presented in the default text editor (e.g., Notepad). ● For ISD first a batch task file Embeddingconfig_znb.abt is created and then the tool is run in batch mode (see the ISD User Guide) Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:RUN:RUN...
  • Page 578 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": linear insertion loss ● "Non-Linear" (default): non-linear insertion loss ● "Resonant": the 2x thru test coupon will be split and used directly for deembedding This option may be more accurate when the fixture and 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location.
  • Page 579 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Scaling for Flt Tm ← Lead Ins Overrides the lead-in’s flight time (i.e. its delay) in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long. Default is 1. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe Automatic Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins ←...
  • Page 580 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool ● "Ports on right": skip the ports on the right (according to the selected port sequence) ● "Manually set ports": use Ports to Skip (manual) to define the ports to be skipped Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:NONE CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:LEFT CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP:RIGHt...
  • Page 581 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FREQuency DC Extrapolation ← Calculations This setting is only active, if a recent version of the ISD tool (from 2019-12 or later) is used. If unchecked (default), the touchstone data of the generated deembedding file reach down to the start frequency of the instrument sweep.
  • Page 582 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Total Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the Test Fixture ● "Ports 1&3 on Left" (default): odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
  • Page 583 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 514), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview" on page 561. Type Switches between "Deembedding"...
  • Page 584 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 585 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Use the complementary dock widget to create Balanced Panel and to activate or deac- tivate dembedding/embedding for selected balanced ports (see Chapter 6.14.1.5, "Bal- anced Panel", on page 556). Background information Refer to the section Chapter 5.6.2.10, "Combining Several De-/Embedding Networks", on page 183.
  • Page 586 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool You can define independent transformation networks for all balanced ports. Remote command: The <LogPt> numeric suffix in the embedding/deembedding commands identifies the logical port; see e.g. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced: EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe]. Network The graphical list contains all available 4-port networks (see Chapter 5.6.2.4, "Circuit Models for 4-Port Networks",...
  • Page 587 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool D1, D2 The "D1" and "D2" buttons are enabled as long as the selected Network comprises subnetworks that are defined via two-port or four-port Touchstone files (*.s2p, *.s4p). When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 588 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate ground loop dembedding and embedding (see Chapter 6.14.1.6, "Ground Loop Panel", on page 557). multiple port groups (DUTs) are configured and Ground Loop per Port Group enabled, use the dock widget to select the port group whose ground loop network shall be configured.
  • Page 589 Otherwise the same de-/embedding network is used for all active ports. The checkbox is only visible if the instrument supports multiple DUTs, which is the case for 4-port R&S ZNA. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:GROup User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 590 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool 6.14.9 Differential Match Tab Allows you to specify a 2-port embedding network for the differential mode of a bal- anced port. Such a network is either defined ● via its S-parameter stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p) or ●...
  • Page 591 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Logical Port Logical analyzer port, as defined in the "Balanced Ports" configuration. The transfor- mation networks are defined such that the physical analyzer test ports are connected to the left of the circuit; the DUT ports are on the right side. You can define independ- ent embedding networks for all balanced ports.
  • Page 592 ® GUI Reference R&S Offset Embed Softtool Offset > Calculate after De-/Embed. Changes the position of the "Offset" calculation in the "Offset Embed" calculation chain. If unchecked (default), the offset is calculated before de-/embedding. If checked, it is calculated after de-/embedding. = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command:...
  • Page 593 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool 6.15 File Print Softtool The "File Print" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: System – [File Print] 6.15.1 Recall Sets Tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings.
  • Page 594 To create a recall set based on the current analyzer configuration, select Save. To open an existing recall set, select Open Recall..To create an additional setup, select New. The R&S ZNA supports two recall set file formats ● znxml (default) XML based file format, introduced with the R&S ZNA ●...
  • Page 595 Note: In case the recall set could only be loaded after adjusting some incompatible settings, the info message "The setup data changed while loading" is displayed. This may happen, for example, if you attempt to load a recall set of a different R&S ZNA model or with different optioning. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:STATe Save Saves the active recall set to a file (*.znxml|*.znx) .
  • Page 596 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e. ● if the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...
  • Page 597 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool Print... Opens a dialog that allows to define the content, printer and page settings (see Chap- ter 6.15.4, "Printer Setup Dialog", on page 597). To File... Opens the "Save Image" dialog that allows you to select an output format and to save the diagram content to a file.
  • Page 598 ® GUI Reference R&S File Print Softtool The HCOPy... commands provide the printer settings; see Chapter 8.3.7, "HCOPy Commands", on page 988. 6.15.4.1 Content Tab The "Content" tab allows you to select the contents to be printed. The selected item in the "Print Charts" group specifies how the active recall set is prin- ted.
  • Page 599 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Tip: The printer settings are not affected by a preset of the R&S ZNA. Use the "Remote" tab in the System Config Dialog to restore default settings. 6.15.5 Trace Data Tab Chapter 6.5.10, "Trace Data Tab",...
  • Page 600 The "DUT Centric Wizard" lets you proceed with the followng steps: 1. Select the "DUT Type". Currently, this can be either "Mixer" or "Amplifier", where "Mixer" measurements require option R&S ZNA-K4 (see Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measure- ments", on page 198). Other DUT types may be added in future releases of the analyzer firmware.
  • Page 601 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool 4. Select the measurements to be performed. At this point, the wizard knows how many additional channels are required, and how they should be set up per default. 5. Adjust the default channel settings to your needs. 6.
  • Page 602 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager" to persist new/modified mixer settings to the DUT man- ager when you proceed to the next step of the "DUT Centric Wizard". If a DUT with the same name exists, you are asked whether you want to overwrite the existing DUT con- figuration, or to create a DUT with a different name.
  • Page 603 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Figure 6-35: Mixer/VNA connections Figure 6-36: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of analyzer ports and the number of independent sources (on the VNA and connected external generators). User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 604 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Measurement Selection The "Measurement Selection" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to select the mixer properties to be measured. Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard"...
  • Page 605 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 604 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements ● one channel for group delay measurements Summary The "Summary"...
  • Page 606 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you select "Calibrate Newly Created Channels", then on closing the "DUT Centric Wizard", the FW will create the channels and proceed with suitable calibrations. 6.16.1.2 Guided Amplifier Setup Define DUT The "Define DUT"...
  • Page 607 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Similar to the Amplifier Configuration Dialog of the Manager. Load from DUT Manager Use "Load from DUT Manager" to load a previously configured mixer from the DUT manager. This will open a dialog that allows you to select the DUT to be loaded: Save to DUT Manager Use "Save to DUT Manager"...
  • Page 608 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool DUT/VNA Connections The "DUT/VNA Connections" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" allows you to configure the RF connections between VNA and DUT. Figure 6-37: Mixer/VNA connections User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 609 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Figure 6-38: Amplifier/VNA connections Which connections are actually possible, depends on the number of analyzer ports and the number of independent sources (on the VNA and connected external generators). Measurement Selection The "Measurement Selection" page of the "DUT Centric Wizard" allows you to select the amplifier properties to be measured.
  • Page 610 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Channel Settings The "Channel Settings" page allows you to change the measurement channel configu- ration proposed by the "DUT Centric Wizard" based on the properties of the DUT, the RF topology and the selected measurements. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 611 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Depending on the "Measurement Selection" on page 604 either one, two, or three channels must be set up: ● one channel for S-parameter measurements ● one channel for intermodulation measurements Summary The "Summary" page of the "DUT Sentric Wizard" ●...
  • Page 612 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Calibrate Newly Created Channels If you select "Calibrate Newly Created Channels", then on closing the "DUT Centric Wizard", the FW will create the channels and proceed with suitable calibrations. 6.16.2 DUT Manager Dialog The DUT manager allows you to create, configure, and manage DUTs. Access: ●...
  • Page 613 Amplifier Configuration Dialog Mixer Configuration Dialog. The DUT type "Mixer" is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR&S ZNA-K4. See Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 198. Allows you to create a user-defined DUT. Filter by DUT Type is set to a particular DUT type, a DUT of this type is created immediately.
  • Page 614 ® GUI Reference R&S DUT Softtool Copy This button is only active, if exactly one row is selected in the table area. It allows you to copy the selected DUT. Delete This button is only active, if at least one row is selected in the table area. It allows you to delete the selected DUTs.
  • Page 615 Access: DUT Manager Dialog > "Edit..." with a DUT of type "Mixer" selected The DUT type "Mixer" is only availble if the instrument is equipped with software optionR&S ZNA-K4. See Chapter 5.7.3, "Frequency Conversion Measurements", on page 198. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 616 Note that Embedded LO Mixer Group Delay Measurements requires option R&S ZNA- Use Fixed Freq Uncheck "Use Fixed Freq" if you want the LO signal to vary in frequency, which will enable "LO Freq Min" and "LO Freq Max". Otherwise only "LO Fixed Freq" is enabled.
  • Page 617 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool The standard application "External Tools" is always available, other applications are provided by certain software options. 6.17.1 External Tools Application The "External Tools" application gives access to pre-installed and user-defined external tools. Access: System – [Applic] > "External Tools" GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts.
  • Page 618 6.17.2 TDR Application (R&S ZNA-K20) The "TDR" (Time Domain Reflectometry) application is provided by the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20. It is only visible if this option is installed. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" Background information Chapter 5.7.2.7, "Extended Time Domain...
  • Page 619 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.1 TDR Setup Tab The "TDR Setup" tab allows you to set up the measurement for the time domain trans- formation, which is then used to analyze the time domain behavior of the DUT (eye diagram, rise time, skew, ...).
  • Page 620 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Opens the "Balanced Ports" dialog that allows to configure the logical DUT ports (see Chapter 6.2.2.5, "Balanced Ports Dialog", on page 252) ● "Stimulus..." Opens the TDR Stimulus Settings Dialog that allows to configure the frequency sweep whose results are then used for the time domain transformation ●...
  • Page 621 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Advanced settings can be accessed via "Advanced Settings..." (see "TDR Stimulus - Advanced Settings Dialog" on page 622). Max. DUT Measure Delay / Max. El. Length / Max. Mech. Length Defines the "length" of the DUT, which can either be specified as delay, electrical length, or mechanical length.
  • Page 622 410. DC Value Defines how to calculate the DC gain of the DUT (since the R&S ZNA cannot measure down to 0 Hz). These parameters are the same settings as for the standard time domain option R&S ZNA-K2. For a description and related remote control commands "DC Value"...
  • Page 623 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Eye Diagram The "Eye Diagram" checkbox enables the eye diagram with the current settings (default or defined in Eye Diagram Dialog) or disables it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STATe Eye Diagram ... Opens the Eye Diagram Dialog that allows to create an eye diagram and to perform basic settings on the simulated digital signal generator.
  • Page 624 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Figure 6-41: Eye Diagram Results (NRZ Modulation) ● For PAM modulation types only a reduced set of "Basic" results is available. Figure 6-42: Eye Diagram Results (PAM Modulations) For a description of the result values see "Eye Diagram Results"...
  • Page 625 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool For PAM signals these results are not available. For a description of the result values see "Eye Diagram Results" on page 194. Furthermore it is possible to change the Rise (and Fall) Time definition for the eye measurement from the standard 10–90% (90–10%) step to any other "Start Value"/"Stop Value"...
  • Page 626 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool For advanced configuration of the eye diagram simulation see Chapter 6.17.2.5, "Advanced Settings Dialog", on page 629 Measurement / Topology "Measurement" allows you to select an S-Parameter, i.e. the transmission (or reflec- tion) whose time domain properties shall be analyzed. The "Topology" to the right is updated accordingly.
  • Page 627 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Load Bit Stream A user-defined bit stream can be loaded from file and is repeated until the configured Length is reached. If no pattern is loaded from file, the default pattern "10" is repeated instead.
  • Page 628 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:OLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:ZLEVel Low Pass Defines the signal shape of the simulated digital signal: toggles between ideal rectan- gular shape ("Low Pass" = disabled, default) and a more realistic shape ("Low Pass" = enabled).
  • Page 629 The "Advanced Settings" dialog gives full access to the calculation chain of the eye diagram simulation. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Eye Diag" > "Advanced Settings..." This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Controls in the Dialog ● Generator, Emphasis,...
  • Page 630 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Simulated Bit Pattern / Simulated Rise Time Chapter 6.17.2.4, "Eye Diagram Dialog", on page 625 Modulation "Modulation" on page 627 High Level / Low Level "High Level / Low Level"...
  • Page 631 Advanced Settings Dialog This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. In transmission systems known losses of the channel are typically compensated already in the transmitter. The most common setting is to boost high frequencies com- pared to low frequencies since the channels show typically larger losses for high fre- quencies.
  • Page 632 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool In dB the pre- and post cursors are defined as: ● Pre Cursor = 20 log ( Vd / Vc ) ● Post 1 Cursor = 20 log ( Vb / Va ) ● Post 2 Cursor = 20 log ( Vc / Vb ) Simple applications of the emphasis only define the Post 1 Cursor.
  • Page 633 Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Four types of jitter can be configured and selectively enabled: random, periodic, Dirac and user defined. If enabled, the jitter is added at the start of each symbol period, and its magnitude depends on the parameters specified in the dialog.
  • Page 634 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:PERiodic CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:MAGNitude CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe Dirac This type of jitter is specified by the amplitude in seconds ("Dirac Delta", positive or negative), as well as the probability of the jitter occurring at each symbol period ("Dirac Probability").
  • Page 635 The "Define Noise" dialog allows you to add Gaussian noise to the digital signal simu- lated for the eye diagram. Access: "Noise" button in the Advanced Settings Dialog This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Active Enables/disables noise insertion. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:STATe Defines the root mean square noise level.
  • Page 636 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Measurement / Topolgy "Measurement / Topology" on page 626 DC Value "DC Value" on page 335 Mode Allows you to switch temporarily between the real DUT (with measured frequency response) and an ideal one (with flat frequency response).
  • Page 637 Applic Softtool This dialog is available with Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 only. Similar to the usage of emphasis the equalization targets to improve the signal quality at the receiver end of the transmission system. The building block "Equalize" simulates a continuous-time linear equalizer (CTLE) which is typically realized as an analog cir- cuit in receivers.
  • Page 638 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.6 Eye Mask Test Tab If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "Eye Mask Test" tab allows you to set up an eye mask for it, to enable testing against this mask and to export the test results.
  • Page 639 This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on mask failures. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 640 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.7 Define Mask Configuration Dialog Allows you to set up the mask the simulated eye diagram shall be tested against. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Eye Mask Test" > "Define Mask..." There are three mask areas that can be set up for the eye diagram test: center poly- gon, top rectangle, and bottom rectangle.
  • Page 641 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Figure 6-44: Center polygon setup: hexagon Figure 6-45: Center polygon setup: rectangle The polygon is centered at the Mask Center. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:HORizontal CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical Top/Bottom Setup Defines and activates the top and bottom rectangles. Both rectangles are horizontally centered at the Mask Center and also their vertical off-...
  • Page 642 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Test Settings Allows you to set the absolute or relative number of mask violations that will result in a mask fail condition. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:CONDition CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:TOLerance CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE Save / Load Mask Configuration Opens a dialog that allows to save/load the mask test configuration to/from a 7bit ASCII file (*.mask).
  • Page 643 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool 6.17.2.8 Rise Time Tab The "Rise Time" tab allows you to enable and configure the Rise Time Measurement. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Rise Time" Access: [Applic] key or "Application > Rise Time" menu Rise Time Enables/disables the rise time measurement.
  • Page 644 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:DATA? 6.17.2.9 Skew Tab The "Skew" tab allows you to enable and configure the Skew Measurement. Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "Skew" Skew Enables/disables the skew measurement between the active trace and the Reference Trace The skew measurement can only be performed if the following conditions are met for...
  • Page 645 Defines the limit value for the skew check. The unit depends on the current format of the X axis (see "Time / Distance" on page 410). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit Skew Fail Beep This checkbox determines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on skew limit violations. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 646 ® GUI Reference R&S Applic Softtool Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP Global Check, TTL1 Pass, TTL2 Pass Chapter 6.6.1, "Limit Test...
  • Page 647 Access: System – [Applic] > "TDR" > "X Axis" ● This tab is only visible if the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20 is available. ● If the active trace is represented as an eye diagram, the "X Axis Settings" are grayed out, as shown above.
  • Page 648 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool 6.18.1 Diagram Tab Selects a diagram as the active diagram, defines a title, deletes or adds diagrams and arranges them on the screen. Many of the functions are unavailable if the active recall set contains only one diagram. Related settings Use the icons in the toolbar to add diagrams and traces.
  • Page 649 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Add Trace + Diagram Creates a diagram and a trace which is displayed in the new diagram. The trace is cre- ated with the channel settings of the previous active trace but with default trace set- tings.
  • Page 650 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Show Title Displays or hides the title area of the active diagram. This property can only be set if Title is non-empty. If "Title" is empty, the title area is always hidden Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe[:STATe] Overlay All Places all traces in a single diagram area which is maximized to occupy the whole...
  • Page 651 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagram areas, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Split" tab. Remote command: No command; display configuration only. 6.18.2 Split Tab Arranges multiple diagrams on the screen.
  • Page 652 "Diagram" tab. Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Split Type The R&S ZNA provides the following split types: ● "Lineup": The diagrams are arranged side by side; each diagram occupies the entire screen height.
  • Page 653 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool If the selected number of "Diagrams" exceeds the number of traces, some of the new diagrams are created with a default trace. Tip: To vary the size and position of the diagrams, drag and drop the separating frames or use the functions in the "Diagram"...
  • Page 654 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool 6.18.3.1 Controls on the Config Tab Color Scheme Controls the colors in the diagram areas. Color schemes are global settings and apply to all active recall sets. The following predefined color schemes are optimized for the analyzer screen and for color hardcopies, respectively: ●...
  • Page 655 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements. Chapter 6.18.3.2, "Define User Color Scheme Dialog", on page 656. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:COLor Hide Sensitive Information Unmasks or masks all stimulus value occurrences in the VNA GUI for the current recall set.
  • Page 656 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Info Window Shows/hides the Info Window Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow[:STATe] Font Size Scales the fonts in the diagrams. The scaling affects the trace and channel lists, and the info fields. Remote command: DISPlay:RFSize 6.18.3.2...
  • Page 657 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Element Selects the screen element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 658 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Limit Test > Colorize Trace when Failed Assigns a different trace color to failed trace segments. The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
  • Page 659 Recall... / Save... Opens standard dialogs to recall a previously saved color scheme or save the current scheme to a file. Color scheme files are non-editable files with the extension *.ColorScheme; the default directory is C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\ColorSchemes. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:CMAP MMEMory:LOAD:CMAP 6.18.3.3...
  • Page 660 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool If a trace is hidden, then its marker and bandfilter search info is also hidden in the "Info Window". Info Window Configuration Dialog The "Info Window Configuration" dialog allows you to select the markers and Display Elements of a Diagram results to be displayed in the...
  • Page 661 ® GUI Reference R&S Display Softtool Figure 6-49: Content selection: bandfilter search info fields Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] 6.18.4 View Bar Tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
  • Page 662 Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:STOols[:STATe] 6.18.5 Touchscreen Tab Allows you to lock the touchscreen functionality of the R&S ZNA to prevent inadvertent entries. Enabled / Lock Diagrams / Lock Screen ● "Enabled" – touchscreen control of the R&S ZNA fully enabled. All control elements are active.
  • Page 663 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● Lock screen – all control elements are locked. Pressing any front panel key on the analyzer (or sending SYSTem:TSLock OFF) re-enables touchscreen control. Remote command: SYSTem:TSLock 6.19 Setup Softtool The "Setup" softtool allows you to define various system-related settings, to manage global resources, to get system information and to execute service functions.
  • Page 664 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool ● "Service Function...": Service Function Dialog Language Selects the language of the graphical user interface. A message box indicates that the vector network analyzer application needs to be restarted to activate a different lan- guage.

  • Page 665: Table Of Contents

    ● Recovery Tab......................677 Presets Tab Specifies the behavior of the R&S ZNA upon a preset. Preset Scope Defines whether a preset affects all open recall sets ("Instrument") or the active recall set only. The "Preset Scope" applies to the GUI and to the...

  • Page 666: Calibration Tab

    SYSTem:PRESet:USER:NAME SYSTem:PRESet:USER[:STATe] Start in Preset If this option is active, the R&S ZNA FW always starts with the configured Preset Con- figuration. Otherwise it starts with the previous state, i.e. the settings that were persis- ted during the previous shutdown.
  • Page 667 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Auto Power Reduction for Cal Unit Sets the source power at all test ports to -10 dBm while an automatic calibration is active. Applying this source power to the ports of the calibration unit ensures best accuracy of the automatic calibration.
  • Page 668 VNA application is started. It is pos- sible to select the default cal kit directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Calibration\Kits or any other directory. "None" means that no additional cal kit files are loaded on start-up.

  • Page 669: User Interface Tab

    If enabled, those beeps are generated even if "Sounds" is unchecked. Note: The R&S ZNA does not have a built-in audio device and loudspeaker. To hear these sounds, connect a USB audio device to the instrument or operate it via remote desktop.
  • Page 670 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool / Transparent Info Fields / Show Sweep Symbols The buttons switch the instrument messages, acoustic messages, transparent info fields for markers and trace statistics, and sweep symbols on or off. ● Transparent info fields do not hide an underlying trace. ●...

  • Page 671: Messages Tab

    Units Prefix Sets the unit prefix for frequencies (Base unit: Hz) to kilo (k), mega (M), giga (G) or tera (T) or lets the R&S ZNA select the appropriate prefix ("Auto" = default setting). Remote command: Reset Colors / Reset Dialogs / Reset Decimal Places / Reset Units Prefix Resets the color settings ("System"...

  • Page 672: Channel Bits Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Show Info Messages / Show Warning Messages / Show Error Messages Selectively disables/enables display of information popups for the related event type. If information popups are globally switched off (Show Instrument Messages unchecked), these buttons are disabled. However, their checked state is memorized. Remote command: SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:INFO SYSTem:ERRor:DISPlay:WARNings...

  • Page 673: Advanced Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool The decimal values have the following effect: ● 0 means that no output signals are enabled at any of the pins 8, 9, 10, 11 and 16, 17, 18, 19. ● 1 enables the output signal at pin 8. The signal is switched on while a measure- ment sweep is running in the selected channel.
  • Page 674 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter Error Dump Type Determines the level of detail ("Minimal" , "Normal", "Large" , "Full" ) and hence the size of the dump files that are created if a firmware exception occurs. "None" disables dump file creation.

  • Page 675: Power Tab

    ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Power Tab The settings in this tab define how the VNA sets the output power during and between sweeps. Power Reduction at Sweep End The power reduction settings apply to all sweep modes but are particularly useful in single sweep mode.
  • Page 676 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Selecting a different behavior can result in a significantly longer total measurement time, in particular if a long "Settling Delay" is used. Do not forget to revert the Power Mode at Sweep End to "Auto" mode if it is not necessary to "Reduce" or "Keep" the power at the sweep end.

  • Page 677: Recovery Tab

    Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LLIMit[:STATe] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:LLIMit:VALue SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:GENerator<Gen>:LLIMit[:STATe] SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:GENerator<Gen>:LLIMit:VALue RF Off Behavior Allows you to define how the R&S ZNA turns the RF power off. "RF Switch Only the RF switch is used. Only (Fast), Default" "RF Switch In addition to the switches, all amplifiers are turned off. Results in and Amp.
  • Page 678 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Common Controls in the Info Dialog The "Save...", "Print... ", and "Save Report" buttons at the bottom of the "Info" dialog allow you to save the contents of the open tab to a file or to create a hardcopy. Save...
  • Page 679 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Software Option Info Software options are listed with their name and description, the option key and key type, and the activation and expiration date (if applicable). Remote command: DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? Hardware Tab Gives an overview of the analyzer's hardware configuration and basic hardware-related instrument settings.
  • Page 680 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Selftest Tab Allows to run an automatic selftest on the analyzer, and to displays its results. Check "Show Details" to see the detailed test results. Error Log Tab Contains a chronological record of errors that occurred in the current and in previous sessions (see Chapter 10.1, "Errors during Firmware Operation",...
  • Page 681 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool For each sweep with at least one lost trigger event, a log entry is created. The time- stamp of an entry indicates the end time of the related sweep. Reload Lost Trigger Log While the "Lost Trigger" tab is open, the display is not refreshed automatically. Use "Reload Lost Trigger Log"...
  • Page 682 Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:SFUNction 6.19.2 Freq. Ref. Tab Selects a reference signal for synchronization between the R&S ZNA and external devices. A common reference frequency is advisable to ensure frequency accuracy and frequency stability in the test setup. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 683 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Reference Source Selects the internal or an external reference clock signal for synchronization. "Internal" The analyzer synchronizes to its internal reference oscillator. The synchronized internal 10 MHz reference clock is also made avail- able at the rear panel Reference Out BNC connector. In addition, a synchronized 100 MHz reference signal can be provided at the Refer- ence In/Out SMA connector (see "Reference I/O (SMA) >...
  • Page 684 SMA connector (100 MHz or 1 GHz). Effective and enabled if and only if the Reference In/Out SMA connector is used as reference clock source. Remote command: [SENSe:]ROSCillator:SMA:INPut 6.19.3 Remote Settings Tab Configures the remote control interfaces of the R&S ZNA. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 685 6.19.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings Tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZNA. By default, the analyzer is config- ured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address informa- tion automatically. See Chapter 11.1.3.1, "Assigning an IP...
  • Page 686 *IDN? and *OPT?, respectively. ● If the DEFAULT language is activated, the factory ID string Rohde&Schwarz,ZNA<Max. Freq>-<Ports>Port,<Order and Serial No>,<FW_Ver- sion> (e.g. Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA26-4Port,1332450024100005,1.50.2.19) is set. The option string is a comma-separated list of all installed software and hardware options.
  • Page 687 Remote control via GPIB The built-in GPIB interface can be used to control external devices. An additional USB- to-IEC/IEEE Adapter is only required in case you want to control the R&S ZNA via GPIB at the same time.. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 688 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool 6.19.4.1 Controls on the Power Meter Tab The buttons in the "Power Meter" tab open the following dialogs: ● "Power Meters...", see Chapter 6.19.4.2, "External Power Meters Dialog", on page 688 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 6.19.4.3, "External Power Meter Config Dia- log", on page 692...
  • Page 689 Setup Softtool The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB interface. 2. If the power meter is connected via LAN, enable LAN Detection 3.
  • Page 690 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: Configured Devices Table with all power meters in use with their properties. Except for the auto-detected Known Devices, to appear in the table of "Configured Devices" a power sensor/meter must have been configured manually using Device.
  • Page 691 IP addresses must agree with the entries in the VISA library. The remaining interface types require composite address formats; see Table 6-9. If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNA, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ●...
  • Page 692 Allows to modify configuration of certain external power meters, i.e. settings that are persistently stored on the power meter (and NOT on the R&S ZNA). This requires the respective device to be online, i.e. connected, switched on and ready to be used.
  • Page 693 The built-in GPIB interface can be used to control external devices. An additional USB- to-IEC/IEEE Adapter is only required in case you want to control the R&S ZNA via GPIB at the same time.. 6.19.5.1 Controls on the Generator Tab "Generators..."...
  • Page 694 Setup Softtool The configuration of a new external generator involves the following steps: 1. Connect the generator to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB inter- face. 2. If the generator is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection"...
  • Page 695 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: n.a. Configured Devices Table with all generators in use with their properties. The properties of manually config- ured generators ("Add Device", opens the "Add External Generator" dialog) may be changed in the dialog. The following generator properties are not defined in the "Add External Generator"...
  • Page 696 Note: "LAN detection" will only work for external devices sharing the same IP subnet with the R&S ZNA. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNA must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473. If necessary, add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings.
  • Page 697 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool If an instrument is connected to the R&S ZNA, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ● "Identify" sends an identification query ("IDN?") to the specified device address in order to identify the type and serial number of the connected generator and select an appropriate driver file.
  • Page 698 Converter Configuration Dialog In the "Converter Configuration" dialog you can define the converter topology, i.e. which converter types are used and how they are connected to the R&S ZNA (and possibly external generators). Converter <i> represents the converter that is connected to VNA port <i>.
  • Page 699 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Converter Type Selects the type of the converter that is connected to the related VNA port. "None" No converter connected to this port ZCxxx<Serial If a converter R&S ZCxxx is connected via USB, it is auto-detected by #>...
  • Page 700 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool "Port <i>" Use a VNA port that is not used as converter port as the LO source. Because this VNA port must be driven by another internal source than the converter port, this selection is not available for 2-port VNAs. "Gen <i>"...
  • Page 701 2. Enter a (unique) name for the new converter type. 3. Modify the converter properties to suit the converter type you want to introduce to the R&S ZNA. Preconfigured converter types are read-only. Defined Converter Types (Tabs) The tabs in the "Converter Types"...
  • Page 702 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Type The name of the converter type. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:CATalog? [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:DEFine Defines the fixed IF frequency of the converter type. Remote command: on page 1056 [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:IFRequency Converter Port: Start Freq./Stop Freq. Defines the start and stop frequency of the (converter port of the) converter type. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:FREQuency Source: Multiplicator...
  • Page 703 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:DEFine Delete Deletes the converter type whose tab is currently selected. Only user-defined converter types can be deleted. Remote command: [SENSe:]CONVerter:DEFinition:DELete 6.19.6.3 Default Cable and Splitter Losses Dialog After the converter ports have been set up in the Converter Configuration Dialog, you can configure the converter port-specific cable and splitter losses and slope factors.
  • Page 704 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Remote command: n.a. Apply to all channels in all setups Use "Apply to all channels in all setups" to write the Cable & Splitter Loss Slope values to the Port Power Offset Slope channel settings of the respective ports. Remote command: SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>[:LEVel][:IMMediate]:OFFSet SOURce<Ch>:POWer<PhyPt>:GENerator<Gen>:OFFSet...
  • Page 705 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool User Control File Directory "Power Control" on page 704 method "User", browse for the folder containing the leveling dataset. Only a folder containing suitable leveling data for the selected Converter Type accepted. Remote command: SOURce:POWer<PhyPt>:CONVerter:TRANsfer:PATH Generic Control File ←...
  • Page 706 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Redefining physical ports causes a factory reset. a wave, b wave, Source Define a physical port by assigning its reference receiver, measurement receiver and generator, respectively. Remote command: [SENSe:]UDSParams<Pt>:PARam [SENSe:]UDSParams:ACTive 6.19.8 Generic Device Tab The "Generic Devices"...
  • Page 707 234. The configuration of a new generic device involves the following steps: 1. Connect the device to your R&S ZNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB inter- face. 2. If the device is connected via LAN, enable "LAN detection"...
  • Page 708 Note: "LAN detection" only works for external devices sharing the IP subnet with the R&S ZNA. As a prerequisite, the R&S ZNA must accept incoming connections on UDP port 2473. If necessary, add a corresponding inbound rule to your firewall settings.
  • Page 709 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Add Device Opens the "Add Generic Device" dialog that allows you to configure the connection to a generic device that was not auto-detected. The configured device is added to the list of "Configured Devices". The connection is defined with the following settings: ●...
  • Page 710 ® GUI Reference R&S Setup Softtool Physical Interface Address Remarks interface (protocol) (connector) USB-VISA <ManID>::<ProdID>::<SerialNo> 2733 (0x0AAD) is the manufacturer ID of Rohde & Schwarz. e.g. 0x0AAD::0x0047::100098 The serial number is device-specific. LAN or USB Other Interface-specific, e.g. for SOCKET: Use complete VISA resource string.
  • Page 711 ® GUI Reference R&S Help Softtool ● The recall set only stores the paths of the command files, but not their contents. When loading the recall set, the referenced command files must be available at the same locations. ● In case loading a command file fails, the Error Log provides more information.
  • Page 712 ® GUI Reference R&S Preset Softtool Open the Info Dialog for full information about the instrument. 6.21 Preset Softtool Access: ● System – [Preset] ● Menu bar: "Channel" > "Preset" > "Select Preset" > (various menu items) 6.21.1 Select Preset Tab The controls on the "Select Preset"...
  • Page 713 ® GUI Reference R&S Preset Softtool More preset options are available via the Presets Tab of the "System Config" dialog. Preset Executes the configured preset action. See "Normal / RF Off / Normal, GUI, Ext Setup / <File Name>" on page 713. Normal / RF Off / Normal, GUI, Ext Setup / <File Name>...
  • Page 714 ® GUI Reference R&S Preset Softtool Remote command: n.a. Save Preset File... Lets you save the current setup to a recall set file and to select it as user preset file one go. Opens a standard "Save File" dialog. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:STATe 1,<RecallSetFile>...
  • Page 715 18). A VISA installation on the remote con- trol PC is required. ● The R&S ZNA can also be remote-controlled via USB. The USB Device connector is on the rear panel of the instrument (see Chapter 4.2, "Instrument Tour",...
  • Page 716 IVI foundation. Compared to its predecessor VXI-11, it provides speed and other improvements. HiSLIP is encapsulated in VISA; the resource string reads TCPIP::<R&S ZNA IP address>::hislip0. The RS Visa library supports HiSLIP. If the connection fails, access the Windows con- trol panel of the controlled instrument and open port 4880 for incoming connections.
  • Page 717 In general, program development is further simplified by a graphical program environment. Rohde & Schwarz offers various R&S ZNA driver types (LabView, LabWindows/ CVI, IVI, VXIplug&play...) for different programming languages. The drivers are available free of charge on the product pages in the R&S internet, along with instal-...
  • Page 718 It remote logging is enabled (SYSTem:LOGGing:REMote[:STATe] ON) the analyzer stores all received commands to the file 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\RemoteLog'. 7.1.4 Switchover to Remote Control On power-up, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper- ated via the front panel controls.
  • Page 719 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control The softkeys in the remote screen are used to modify or quit the remote state: ● "Go to Local" switches the instrument to local state. ● "Display" switches the display on or off. ●...
  • Page 720 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.
  • Page 721 ® Remote Control R&S Introduction to Remote Control 7.1.4.1 Setting the Device Address The GPIB address (primary address) of the instrument is factory-set to 20. It can be changed manually in the System – [Setup] > "Remote Settings" tab or via remote con- trol.
  • Page 722 ® Remote Control R&S Messages 7.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
  • Page 723 ® Remote Control R&S Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
  • Page 724 ® Remote Control R&S Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
  • Page 725 ® Remote Control R&S Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the TRIGger system and defines the trigger source (external trigger).
  • Page 726 ® Remote Control R&S Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 7.2.3 SCPI Parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
  • Page 727 ® Remote Control R&S Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 7.2.3.2 Boolean Parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.
  • Page 728 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts 7.2.3.6 Overview of Syntax Elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.
  • Page 729 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>','< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>' Create or delete channel CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] ON | OFF Create or delete diagram area DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:STATe ON | OFF Display trace in diagram area DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED...
  • Page 730 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no. 1 with the default trace "Trc1". The trace is displayed in diagram area no. 1. CALC1:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11'; DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Trc2' Create a new trace named "Trc2", assigned to channel no. 1 (the suffix 1 after CALC, may be omitted), and display the trace.
  • Page 731 ® Remote Control R&S Basic Remote Control Concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 7.4, "Command Processing",...
  • Page 732 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 7-3: Mixed commands Method...
  • Page 733 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.
  • Page 734 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 7.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 742). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
  • Page 735 ® Remote Control R&S Command Processing :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI. The result could be the value of STARt before the command was sent since the instrument might defer executing the individual commands until a program message terminator is received.
  • Page 736 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.
  • Page 737 STB is structured according to SCPI. By analogy, the ESE can be used as the ENABle part of the ESR. 7.5.1 Overview of Status Registers The status registers of the R&S ZNA are implemented as shown below. not used not used not used -&-...
  • Page 738 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System most significant bit) is set to zero for all parts. Thus the contents of the register parts can be processed by the controller as positive integer. The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register.
  • Page 739 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
  • Page 740 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 7.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
  • Page 741 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning MSS bit (master status summary bit) This bit is set if the instrument triggers a service request. This is the case if one of the other bits of this register is set together with its mask bit in the service request enable reg- ister SRE.
  • Page 742 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Operation Complete This bit is set on receipt of the command *OPC after all previous commands have been executed. Query Error This bit is set if either the controller wants to read data from the instrument without having sent a query, or if it does not fetch requested data and sends new instructions to the instru- ment instead.
  • Page 743 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning INTegrity register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register and the associ- ated ENABle bit is set to 1. LIMit register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
  • Page 744 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System to the order of traces in the response string of the CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? query. ● The number of traces monitored cannot exceed 16. If a setup contains more traces, the newest traces are not monitored. STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity...
  • Page 745 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System Bit No. Meaning Receiver overload protection tripped This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive input level at one of the ports. If this condition persists, all internal and external generators are switched off. Reduce RF input level at the port.
  • Page 746 Query of the error queue 7.5.4.1 Service Request The R&S ZNA can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request causes an interrupt, to which the control program can react appropriately. Initiating an SRQ As shown in section...
  • Page 747 STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register) 3. Set bit 1 in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register The R&S ZNA generates an SRQ when the event associated with bit 1 of the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1:ENABle register occurs, i.e. when any point on the first trace fails the limit check.
  • Page 748 ® Remote Control R&S Status Reporting System 7.5.4.3 Parallel Poll In a parallel poll, up to eight instruments are simultaneously requested by the controller by means of a single command to transmit 1 bit of information each on the data lines, i.e., to set the data line allocated to each instrument to a logical "0"...
  • Page 749 7.5.5 Reset Values of the Status Reporting System The table below indicates the effects of various commands upon the status reporting system of the R&S ZNA. Event Switching on DCL, SDC...
  • Page 750 Chapter 8.4, "R&S ZVR/ZVABT Compatible Commands", on page 1343. If you want to make full use of the R&S ZNA features but do not need R&S ZVR com- patibility, you should use the commands listed in Chapter 8.3, "SCPI Command Refer- ence",...
  • Page 751 The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters. It is recommended to use either the short form or the long form; mixed forms are not always recognized. The R&S ZNA itself does not distinguish uppercase and lowercase characters.
  • Page 752 Event Status Read *IDN? – / query only Queries the instrument identification string of the R&S ZNA, including the man- ufacturer, the instrument type, its serial number, and the software revision. The Identification Query response is of the form Rohde-Schwarz,ZNA<Max.
  • Page 753 Wait to continue 8.3 SCPI Command Reference The following sections provide detailed reference information on the instrument con- trol commands implemented by the R&S ZNA network analyzer. ● CALCulate Commands..................754 ●...
  • Page 754 Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not a global, composite limit check on several traces has failed. Since V2.20 of the R&S ZNA FW the result is automatically recalculated whenever a relevant setting is changed, i.e. a subsequent query will return the updated limit viola- tion state.
  • Page 755 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Data format The trace data is transferred in either ASCII or block data (REAL) format, depending on the setting. If block data format is used, it is recommended to FORMat[:DATA] select EOI as a receive terminator (SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]: RTERminator EOI).
  • Page 756 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Return values: <Data> Response values either in ASCII or block data format, depend- ing on the current setting. FORMat[:DATA] Example: Analogous to CALCulate:DATA:DALL?; see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA. Usage: Query only CALCulate:DATA:TRACe <TraceName>, <Format>, <Data>... The query gets the trace data of an arbitrary (not necessarily the active) trace, refer- enced by its trace name <TraceName>.

  • Page 757: Calculate:Data:call

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note ● Importing data is only supported in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>: CONTinuous OFF) ● Before importing data, the channel must be configured with the same settings that were used during export (user calibration, balanced port configuration, stimulus axis etc.).

  • Page 758: Calculate:Data:channel:all

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CHANnel:ALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all traces of the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
  • Page 759 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the previously defined S-parameter group. Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see on page 759. CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA <Format>, <Data>...
  • Page 760 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; SWE:POIN 20 Create a trace with 20 sweep points, making the created trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mnemonic SENSe1). CALC:DATA? FDAT Query the 20 response values of the created trace. In the FDATa setting, 20 comma-separated ASCII values are returned.
  • Page 761 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference MDATa Unformatted trace data (see SDATa) after evaluation of trace mathematics. [Data access point 5] TSData Raw measured values in pulse profile mode, only available for wave quantities and if pulse profile mode is active. The values correspond to the real output val- ues of the A/D converter;...

  • Page 762: Calculate:Data:nsweep[:Last]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Tip: Use the generalized command to read or [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa write error terms for arbitrary analyzer ports. For additional programming examples refer to Chapter 9.2.5.3, "Saving and Recalling Error Terms", on page 1397. CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep[:LAST]? <Format>, <RvCount> Reads the response values of a trace acquired in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF).
  • Page 763 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference This command can only be used for > 1. [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt? <Format>, <FwCount>[, <FwCountEnd>] Reads the response values of a trace or a consecutive group of traces acquired in sin- gle sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF).

  • Page 764: Calculate:Data:stimulus

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Usage: Query only CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:STIMulus? Reads the stimulus values of the active data or memory trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:DATA Usage: Query only 8.3.1.3 CALCulate:DLINe... The CALCulate:DLINe... commands control the horizontal line used to mark and retrieve response values (display line).
  • Page 765 Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.4 CALCulate:DTIMe... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the skew measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20..................765 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:DATA? ................765 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL? ............... 766 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP ................766 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:LIMit...
  • Page 766 1 – skew check has failed Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K20 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:LIMit:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on skew limit violations. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 767 Defines the position of the skew measurement. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <SkewPos> Skew position as integer percentage of the step size Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Skew Position" on page 645 CALCulate<Chn>:DTIMe:STATe <Boolean> Enables/disables the Skew Measurement.
  • Page 768 Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.5 CALCulate:EYE... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the eye diagram measurement provi- ded with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20...................769 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:DUT:MODE .............769 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> ............... 770 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE ................. 770 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:STATe...
  • Page 769 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <DUTMode> IDEal | MEASured Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Mode" on page 636 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:POST<1|2> <Weight> Sets the weights of the post-cursor taps for the pre-emphasis FIR filter in the calcula- tion chain of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 770 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Cursor Settings" on page 632 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EMPHasis:CURSor:PRE <Weight> Sets the weight of the pre-cursor tap for the pre-emphasis FIR filter in the calculation chain of the related eye diagram.

  • Page 771: Calculate:Eye:equalization:ctle:pole<1|2

    Parameters: <DC Gain> *RST: 0 dB Default unit: dB Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "CTLE Equalizer" on page 637 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:EQUalization:CTLE:POLE<1|2> <CTLE Poles> Specifies the poles of the CTLE (a two-pole filter with single zero) used at the receiver simulation of the related eye diagram.

  • Page 772: Calculate:Eye:equalization:state

    <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Active" on page 637 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:BPATtern:TYPE <BitPattern> Defines the type of bit stream to be simulated for the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 773 <DataRate> Data rate with units BPS, KBPS (=10^3 BPS), MBPS (=10^6 BPS), GBPS (=10^9 BPS) Default unit: BPS Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Symbol Rate" on page 627 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:LENGth:BITS <BitLength> Defines the length of a user-defined bit stream to be simulated for the related eye dia- gram.
  • Page 774 Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <VoltageLevel> Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "High Level / Low Level" on page 627 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:DATA <RiseTime> Sets/gets the rise time of the low pass in the binary signal generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 775 R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <RiseTime> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Rise Time / Rise Time Definition" on page 628 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:INPut:RTIMe:THReshold <RiseThreshold> Selects the appropriate rise time definition for the low pass in the binary signal genera- tor simulation of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 776 Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <DiracProbability> Probability of the jitter occurring at each symbol period *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Dirac" on page 634 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:FREQuency <PeriodicFrequency> Defines the frequency of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 777 Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeriodicMagnitude> *RST: 1 ns Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic" on page 633 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:PERiodic:PHASe <PeriodicPhase> Defines the phase of the periodic jitter in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 778 Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Active" on page 633 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:DIRac <Boolean> Enables/disables Dirac jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye dia- gram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 779: Calculate:Eye:jitter:periodic:magnitude

    Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Periodic" on page 633 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:TYPE:RANDom <Boolean> Enables/disables random jitter insertion in the generator simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 780: Calculate:Eye:mask Auto

    CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "User Specific" on page 634 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK AUTO Automatically creates an eye mask, based on the current eye measurement settings. Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 781: Calculate:Eye:mask:data

    <VerticalOffset> Vertical offset relative to the 0 V level, i.e. the Voltage level of the center. Default unit: V Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Mask Center" on page 641 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:DATA? Returns the detailed results of the mask test in the related eye diagram (i.e. the con- tents of the corresponding result info field).

  • Page 782: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail

    "Mask Test On" on page 638 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:FAIL:BEEP <Boolean> Defines whether the R&S ZNA should make an audible beep on mask failures in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 783 RATE: The eye mask test will fail if the share of the samples vio- lating the mask is higher than a configurable percentage (see CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:VIOLation:RATE). *RST: SAMPles Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Test Settings" on page 642 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:STATe <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:STATe <Boolean>...
  • Page 784 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Width> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Top/Bottom Setup" on page 641 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:BOTTom:VERTical <Offset> CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:TOP:VERTical <Offset> Defines the offset of the bottom/top rectangle in the mask of the related eye diagram.
  • Page 785 Parameters: <Main> Default unit: s <Minor> Default unit: s Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Polygon Setup" on page 640 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:SHAPe:POLYgon:VERTical <Main>[, <Minor>] Defines the main [and minor] height of the center polygon in the mask of the related eye diagram. The...

  • Page 786: Calculate:Eye:mask:fail:condition

    <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Show Mask" on page 638 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MASK:STATe <Boolean> Defines whether the eye mask test shall be run after every recalculation of the related eye diagram.

  • Page 787: Calculate:Eye:measurement:data

    SAMPles. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <ViolationTolerance> Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Test Settings" on page 642 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:DATA? Returns the measurement results of the related eye diagram (see "Eye Diagram Results"...

  • Page 788: Calculate:Eye:measurement:state

    Eye Top,2.734 V, Eye Mean,0.000 V, Eye Amplitude,5.468 V' Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Display Measurements" on page 623 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:MEASurement:STATe <Boolean> Defines the visibility of the result info field in the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.

  • Page 789: Calculate:Eye:measurement:ttime:threshold

    <integer>: Lower rise time threshold as integer percentage *RST: T1_9: <UpperThreshold> Upper rise time threshold as integer percentage Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Measurements..." on page 624 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:NOISe:RMS <NoiseRMS> Defines the root mean square (RMS) noise level in the generator simulation of the rela- ted eye diagram.
  • Page 790 Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Active" on page 635 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STATe <Boolean> Defines whether the active trace in the selected channel shall be represented as an eye diagram.
  • Page 791 <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Low Pass" on page 628 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:STIMulus:SCRambler <Boolean> Enables/disables the scrambler in the bit stream simulation of the related eye diagram. This command will raise an execution error if the active trace in the selected channel is not an eye diagram.
  • Page 792 CALCulate<Chn>:EYE:JITTer:STATe Conversely, if CALCulate1:EYE:VIEW is set to JITTER and subsequently CALCulate1:EYE:JITTer:STATe is turned OFF, the calculation chain is further shortened to the next active building block. Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "[Slider]" on page 629 8.3.1.6 CALCulate:FILTer[:GATE]... The CALCulate:FILTer[:GATE]... commands define the properties of the time gate which is used to optimize the time domain response.
  • Page 793 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns; STOP 3 Restrict the time gate to the time interval between 2 ns and 3 ns. CALCulate:FILTer:GATE:TIME:AOFFset ON Activate an offset of the time gate according to a new delay set- ting.
  • Page 794 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CenterTime> Center time of the time gate Range: -99.8999999 s to +99.8999999 s Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 1.5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON; :CALC:FILT:TIME: STAT ON Reset the instrument and enable the time domain representation and the time gate.
  • Page 795 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> MAXimum | WIDE | NORMal | MINimum MINimum - Steepest edges (rectangle) WIDE - Normal gate (Hann) NORM - Steep edges (Hamming) Maximum - Maximum flatness (Bohman) *RST: WIDE...
  • Page 796 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STARt <StartTime> CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STOP <StopTime> These commands define the start and stop times of the time gate, respectively. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate. Range: -100 s to +99.999999999998 s (start time ) and -99.999999999998 s to +100 s (stop time)
  • Page 797 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:WINDow <TimeGate> Selects the time gate to be applied to the time domain transform. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGate> RECT | HAMMing | HANNing | BOHMan | DCHebyshev RECT - steepest edges (rectangle) HANN - normal gate (Hann) HAMMing - steep edges (Hamming)
  • Page 798 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon types SYMMetric2x | OPEN1x | SHORt1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command starts the measurement of the coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe]).
  • Page 799 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the cur- rent directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory) Manual operation: "Load File / 1x Open Preset / 1x Short Preset " on page 574 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:TYPE), this command starts the mea-...
  • Page 800 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon: MEASure:OPEN CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt Suffix: <Ph_pt> Physical port number Parameters: <Boolean> 1 (ON, true) if the test coupon is connected to port <Ph_pt>, 0 (OFF, false) otherwise Example: Chapter 9.2.7, "Fixture...
  • Page 801 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Corresponds to the active_dut batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <DUTType> PASSive | ACTive Manual operation: "DUT Type" on page 579 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test fixture is connected.
  • Page 802 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Automatic Flt Tm for DUT + Lead Ins" on page 579 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:OPERation <Operation> Defines the execution mode of the ISD tool. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Operation> FAST | ACCurate ACCurate: normal execution mode FAST: reduces the execution time to ~50%...
  • Page 803 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Port Sequence" on page 579 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:PORT:SKIP <String> Tells the ISD tool which ports (in the measured DUT + Test Fixture file) shall be skip- ped when the tool is run. Equivalent to using the ports_to_skip batch mode parameter of the ISD tool with a list of (positive) port numbers.
  • Page 804 DUT + test fixture (using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure) finished successfully The resulting Touchstone files are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde- Schwarz\ZNA\Embedding. If result files with the same name already exist, they will be overwritten. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored.
  • Page 805 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <MaxFrequency> Default unit: Hz Manual operation: "Max Freq to Deembed" on page 580 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:SCALe:FTIMe <FltLeadInScalingTime> Overrides the lead-in’s flight time in case the through-trace test coupon is a bit too short or too long.
  • Page 806 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:AUTO <Boolean> Defines whether the SFD tool shall perform automatic impedance adjustments. Suffix: <Ph_pt> This suffix is ignored. Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Adjust Impedance Mismatch" on page 582 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command starts the measurement of the coupon at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[: STATe]).
  • Page 807 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Coupon Type" on page 574 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure).
  • Page 808 MEASure:FILename ● the measurement of DUT + test fixture (using CALCulate:FMODel: SFD<Ph_pt>:DUT:MEASure) finished successfully. The resulting Touchstone files are written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde- Schwarz\ZNA\Embedding. If result files with the same name already exist, they will be overwritten. Suffix: <Ph_pt> Usage: Event Manual operation: "Run <Fixture Modeling Tool>"...
  • Page 809 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation: "Total Port Ordering"...
  • Page 810 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference The meaning of the parameters is as follows (see also table in CALCulate<Chn>: description): MARKer<Mk>:FORMat MLINear Displays |z| in a Cartesian diagram MLOGarithmic Calculates |z| in dB (= 20 log|z|) and displays it in a Cartesian diagram MAGNitude (for compatibility with R&S ZVR ana- lyzers)
  • Page 811 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Display unit" on page 260 8.3.1.9 CALCulate:GDAPerture... The CALCulate:GDAPerture... commands configure the group delay measure- ment. CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt <Steps> Defines an aperture for the calculation of the group delay as an integer number of fre- quency sweep steps.
  • Page 812 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Mode> MAGPhase | REIMag Selects the averaging mode. MAGPhase Averaging of magnitude and phase (default) of the complex trace value REIMag Averaging of real and imaginary part of the complex trace value Manual operation: "Mode"...
  • Page 813 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Constant> Constant value Range: The range depends on the trace format. For the default trace: -200 dB to + 200 dB. Increment: 10E-2 dB *RST: 0 dB Example: on page 812 CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:AUTO Manual operation: "Constant"...
  • Page 814 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LDEViation:SLOPe <Slope> Defines the slope of the regression line for the linearity deviation calculation. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <Slope> Slope of the regression line Range: The range depends on the trace format. For the default trace: -1015 dB/MHz to +1015 dB/MHz.

  • Page 815: Calculate:limit:circle:fail:all

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ............826 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula ..........827 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe ............. 827 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:INTerpol ..........828 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........828 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ..............828 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:TYPE ................829 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................829 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ................830 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA ..............830 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? [<RecallSet>] Returns a 0 or 1 to indicate whether or not the circle limit check has failed for at least one channel in the referenced recall set.

  • Page 816: Calculate:Limit:circle[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Example: Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:STATe ON;...

  • Page 817: Calculate:Limit:circle:fail

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Circle limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U.
  • Page 818 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation: "Clear Test" on page 361 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CONTrol[:DATA] <StartStim>, <StopStim>[, ...] Defines the stimulus values of the limit line and/or creates new limit line segments. See also Chapter 5.4.1.1, "Rules for Limit Line Definition",...
  • Page 819 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Select a lin. frequency sweep (default) and define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values (–40 dB). CALC:LIM:DISP ON Show the limit line segment in the active diagram.
  • Page 820 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Range: 0, 1, 2 (see above) <StartStim>, Stimulus and response values of the first and last points of the <StopStim>, limit line segment. <StartResp>, The unit of the stimulus values is adjusted to the sweep type of <StopResp>...
  • Page 821 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CenterX> X position (real part) of the display circle's center <CenterY> Y position (imaginary part) of the display circle's center <Radius> Radius of the display circle Manual operation: "Draw Circle / Radius, Center X, Center Y"...
  • Page 822 Tip: Use to perform a composite (global) limit check. CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? Since V2.20 of the R&S ZNA FW the result is automatically recalculated whenever a relevant setting is changed, i.e. a subsequent query will return the updated limit viola- tion state.
  • Page 823 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer/UPPer sets the type and response values of even/odd limit line segments and gets the response values of even/odd limit line seg- ments - no matter what the current type of these segments actually is! Both commands will only work, if the total number of limit line segments is even.
  • Page 824 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:LIM:LOW -10, 0, 0, -10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range. Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition. CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 10, 10, 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments .
  • Page 825 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt <LimShift> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt <LimShift> These commands shift all lower and upper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction. Both commands shift all limit lines; they have the same func- tionality.
  • Page 826 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB. :CALC:LIM:SEGM:AMPL:STAR 5;...

  • Page 827: Calculate:Limit:control[:Data]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST SENS:FREQ:STAR 1GHz SENS:FREQ:STOP 3GHz CALC:LIM:CONT 1GHz, 2GHz, 2GHz, 3GHz CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM '22-(20/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM:STAT ON CALC:LIM:SEGM2:FORM '15-(6/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM2:TYPE LMIN CALC:LIM:DISP ON CALC:LIM:STAT ON Manual operation: "Linear/Formula" on page 366 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe <State> Defines whether a custom formula is used for limit line segment <Seg> of the related trace.

  • Page 828: Calculate:Limit:data

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Segment List" on page 363 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <FreqPowTime> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP <StimVal> These commands change the start and stop stimulus values (i.e. the smallest and the largest stimulus values) of a limit line segment. A segment must be created first to enable the commands (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA).
  • Page 829 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number Parameters: <LimLineType> LMIN | LMAX | OFF Limit line type Range: LMAX (upper limit line segment), LMIN (lower limit line segment), OFF (limit check switched off, limit line segment not deleted) *RST: LMAX...

  • Page 830: Calculate:Limit:fail

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. Manual operation: "Limit Check"...
  • Page 831 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.13 CALCulate:MARKer... The CALCulate:MARKer... commands control the marker functions. The com- mands are device-specific and beyond what is specified in the SCPI subsystem SOURce:MARKer................. 832 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] ................832 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE ............833 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter ................ 833 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer[:STATe]:AREA ..............

  • Page 832: Calculate:marker:coupled[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ................854 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE ...................855 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X ...................855 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:Y CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables marker coupling to the active trace of the active channel or disables it. to select the suitable coupling type before CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:TYPE setting CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled:STATe to ON. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 833 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: on page 832 CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] Manual operation: "Coupling Type" on page 400 CALCulate:MARKer:FUNCtion:BWIDth:GMCenter <arg0> Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband. Parameters: <arg0> ON – use geometric mean of lower and upper band edge OFF –...
  • Page 834 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <OutFormat> MLINear | MLOGarithmic | PHASe | POLar | GDELay | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | LINPhase | LOGPhase | IMPedance | ADMittance | DEFault | COMPlex | MDB | MLPHase | MDPHase | MIMPedance | PIMPedance | PADMittance | MADMittance | MPIMpedance | MPADmittance | INDX DEFault means the default marker format is dynamically adjus-...

  • Page 835: Calculate:Marker:mpeak:excursion:state

    <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number Usage: Event Options: R&S ZNA-K1 Manual operation: "Spectrum = Marker" on page 386 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion <TargetSearchVal> Defines a minimum excursion value for multiple peak searches. to activate it. CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 836 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the minimum excursion for multiple peak searches. to set the minimum peak excur- CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion sion. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...

  • Page 837: Calculate:Marker:search:bfilter:result[:State]:Area

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - show the bandfilter search results. If no bandfilter search has been initiated before (CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: BFILter), nothing is displayed. FUNCtion:EXECute OFF - hide the bandfilter search results. *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth Manual operation: "Result Off"...
  • Page 838 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth <Bandwidth> Sets the bandfilter level for a bandfilter search or returns the results. The command is only available after a bandfilter search has been executed (CALCulate<Chn>: BFILter; see example below). MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute The response to the query CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:BWIDth? contains the following bandfilter search results: ●...

  • Page 839: Calculate:Marker:Delta[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BWID:MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers M1 to M4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area. CALC:MARK:BWID 6 Select a 6-dB bandwidth for the bandstop.

  • Page 840: Calculate:Marker:Excursion

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number Parameters: <Value> Minimum peak excursion The unit is derived from the active trace format and cannot be modified. Changing the trace format resets the excursion to a format-specific default value. Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...

  • Page 841: Calculate:Marker:Function:center

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE <BandfilterType> Selects the bandfilter search mode. In contrast to manual control, bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.

  • Page 842: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user[:Range]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] <NumSearchRange> Assigns a search range no. <NumSearchRange> to marker no <Mk> and selects the search range, e.g. in order to display range limit lines or define the start and stop val- ues. Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 843: Calculate:Marker:Function:domain:user:start

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <StopSearchRange> These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe]. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <StopSearchRange>...

  • Page 844: Calculate:Marker:Function:execute

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Mode Find... MAXimum Absolute maximum in the search range (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] MINimum Absolute maximum in the search range RPEak Next valid peak to the right of the current marker position LPEak Next valid peak to the left NPEak Next highest or lowest value among the valid peaks (next peak) TARGet...

  • Page 845: Calculate:Marker:Function:start

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MARK ON; MARK:DELTa ON Create marker 1 in the center of the current sweep range and enable the delta mode. CALC:MARK:X 300MHz Increase the stimulus value of the delta marker by 300 MHz. CALC:MARK:FUNC:SPAN Set the sweep range equal to 300 MHz.
  • Page 846 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Mode> CONTinuous | DISCrete CONTinuous - marker can be positioned on any point of the trace, and its response values are obtained by interpolation. DISCrete - marker can be set to discrete sweep points only. *RST: CONT Example:...
  • Page 847 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK ON Create the reference marker and marker 1 and assign them to trace no. 1. The default position of both markers is the center of the sweep range.

  • Page 848: Calculate:Marker:Name

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:REF:MODE DISC CALC:MARK2:REF:MODE CONT Create the reference marker in discrete mode and marker 2 in continuous mode. CALC:MARK:REF ON; :CALC:MARK2 ON Display the two markers.
  • Page 849 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] In NORMal or FIXed marker mode (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE) this command sets or gets the stimulus value of the reference marker. In ARBitrary mode this is only true if the X axis represents the stimulus. For all other trace formats (see CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat) it sets or gets the X position of the reference marker, which is decoupled from the marker stimulus in this case.

  • Page 850: Calculate:Marker:Reference:x

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: REFerence[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TYPE. For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read- only. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...

  • Page 851: Calculate:Marker:Target

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> Selects the format in which the target value shall be specified (see on page 852). CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet Each marker may have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
  • Page 852 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: Suppose channel 1's selected trace is POLar and marker 1 isn't yet created :CALCULATE1:MARKER1 ON Create/enable Marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:FUNCtion:SELect TARGet Select TARGet search mode for marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:SEARch:FORMat? Query the target format of marker 1. The result is DEF and for polar diagrams the default target format is "Phase".

  • Page 853: Calculate:Marker:Threshold

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <TargetSearchVal> Target search value of marker no. <Mk>. The value range and reset value depend on the selected target format (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch: on page 851). FORMat Example: CALC:MARK ON Create marker no.
  • Page 854 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE <Mode> Sets the marker mode for the related marker. The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <Mode> NORMal | FIXed | ARBitrary NORMal: If tracking is enabled (CALCulate<Chn>:...
  • Page 855 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Marker Mode" on page 382 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X <StimulusValue>[, <Seg>[, <MeasPoint>]] If the mode of the related marker is NORMal or FIXed (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:TYPE), this command sets or gets the marker's stimulus value. In ARBitrary mode this is only true if the X axis represents the stimulus.
  • Page 856 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference The marker must be created before using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Setting this value is only possible in ARBitrary mode (see CALCulate<Chn>: MARKer<Mk>:TYPE. For NORMal and FIXed mode markers it is read-only. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...
  • Page 857 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine <Expression> Defines a mathematical trace for the active trace, using a string expression. ● The expression in the first command refers to raw, unformatted trace data (complex data). In order to apply it, must be set to CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion NORMal and...
  • Page 858 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Type Complete List Description Special Functions StimVal Current stimulus value (see description of operators for User Defined Math) Brackets Priority of operations in complex expressions CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion <Mode> Defines a simple mathematical trace based on the active trace and its active memory trace.
  • Page 859 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Copies the current state of the active data trace to a memory trace. If a mathematical trace is active, the data trace associated with the mathematical trace is copied. The memory trace is named Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>] where <n> counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order, and <Data_Trace>...
  • Page 860 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:SDEF 'Trc1 / Mem2[Trc1]' Define a mathematical trace, dividing the complex data trace by the stored complex memory trace.
  • Page 861 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.15 CALCulate:NFIGure... CALCulate<Chn>:PARameter:NFIGure:CSETtings <arg0> Suffix: <Chn> Setting parameters: <arg0> Usage: Setting only 8.3.1.16 CALCulate:PARameter... The CALCulate:PARameter... commands assign names and measurement parameters to traces. The commands are device-specific..................861 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL ................861 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:MEMory ................862 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? ...............
  • Page 862 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? Returns the trace names and measurement parameters of all traces assigned to a par- ticular channel. The result is a string containing a comma-separated list of trace names and measure- ment parameters, e.g. 'CH4TR1,S11,CH4TR2,S12'. The measurement parameters are returned according to the naming convention of CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: SDEFine.
  • Page 863 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <Ch> may be used to reference a previously defined channel. If <Ch> does not exist, it is generated with default channel settings. Parameters: <LogicalPort1> Logical (balanced or unbalanced) port numbers. The port num- bers must be in ascending order, their number is limited by the test ports of the analyzer.
  • Page 864 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC2:PAR:DEF:SGR 1,2 Create channel 2 and four traces to measure the two-port S- parameters S . The traces are not displayed. DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S11' DISP:WIND:TRAC3:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S12' DISP:WIND:TRAC4:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S21' DISP:WIND:TRAC5:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S22' Display the four traces in the diagram no. 1. INIT2:CONT OFF;...
  • Page 865 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CALL Deletes all traces in channel no. <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Example: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete Trace" on page 317 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory Deletes all memory traces in channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Usage: Event...
  • Page 866 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, string variable, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in "Table Area" on page 319. Trace names must be unique across all channels and diagrams. <Result> Measurement parameter (string variable); see Table 8-4.
  • Page 867 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: To display the trace defined via CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine, cre- ate a diagram (DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] ON) and assign the trace to this diagram (DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED); see example below. changes the measurement result of an CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure existing trace. To select an existing trace as the active trace, use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: SELect.
  • Page 868 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 'SCD11' | ... S-parameters involving balanced ports must be specified in the form S<m_i><m_j><i><j>, where <m_i> and <m_j> denote the port modes of the related logical ports <i> and <j>. In general, for the port modes <m_i><m_j> all pairs of D (differential, balanced), C (common, balanced) and S (single- ended, unbalanced) are allowed.
  • Page 869 <side> = U | L | M (for upper or lower or major), <at DUT> = I | O (for input or output) UTI | UTO | LTI | LTO Upper or lower tone at DUT input or output Noise level at DUT output Requires option R&S ZNA-K30. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 870 Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 'SA1' | 'SA2' | ... Spectrum trace at port 1, 2, ... Requires option R&S ZNA-K1. 'CmpPtPin' | 'CmpPtPout' Compression point power in | out trace for gain compression measurements h<order>b<recPort>(p<drvPort>)[Relative] of order <order>...
  • Page 871 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S . The trace is the active trace in channel 4. CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr2', 'S22' Create another trace named Ch4Tr2 to measure the output reflection coefficient S .
  • Page 872 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..................875 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..............875 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ..............876 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent:COUNt? ............876 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>[:STATe] ............... 877 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit ............877 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult? ..........878 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt ..........878 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP ................879 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................879 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe ................879 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe:AREA CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] <Enable> Configures the display of ripple check info fields for the active recall set. Parameters: <Enable>...
  • Page 873 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain <SweepType> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical units of the stimu- lus values of the ripple limit lines. The unit of the ripple limit is defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 874 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Type> – Boolean identifier for the ripple limit range type. 1 for ripple limit range on (with limit check). 0 for ripple limit range off: The range is defined, but no limit check result displayed. The result is still available via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle: SEGMent<Seg>:RESult?.
  • Page 875 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides all ripple limit lines (including all ranges) associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST;...
  • Page 876 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <UnitRef> COMPlex | MAGNitude | PHASe | REAL | IMAGinary | SWR | GDELay | L | C Keyword for the physical unit of the response values; dimension- less numerss, relative power, phase, time, inductance, capaci- tance units.
  • Page 877 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off. A result is available even if the limit check is disabled; see example for CALCulate<Chn>: RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:RESult?. *RST: n/a (no ripple limit line defined after a reset) Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus: STARt...
  • Page 878 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: In remote control, the ripple limit check result is calculated once at the end of each sweep. If the ripple limits are changed, a new sweep is required to obtain upda- ted ripple limit check results. In single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF), the new sweep must be started explicitly.
  • Page 879 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,3 Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:SEGM:STIM:STAR 1GHZ; STOP 2.5 GHZ; : CALC:RIPP:SEGM:LIM 5 Change the range to a stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2.5 GHz and a limit of 5 dB.
  • Page 880 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos> LEFT | MID | RIGHt Horizontal position <VerticalPos> TOP | MID | BOTTom Vertical position Example: CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 368 8.3.1.19 CALCulate:SMOothing...
  • Page 881 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:SMO ON Activate smoothing for the default trace. CALC:SMO:APER 0.5 Reduce the smoothing aperture to 0.5 %. Manual operation: "Aperture" on page 346 8.3.1.20 CALCulate:STATistics... The CALCulate:STATistics... commands evaluate and display statistical and phase information of the trace.

  • Page 882: Calculate:Statistics[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Statistical info field on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:MMPT ON Reset the instrument, hiding all statistical results. Display the "Min/Max/Peak-Peak" results. CALC:STAT:MSTD ON Display the "Mean/Std Dev" results in addition. CALC:STAT:RMS ON Display the "RMS"...

  • Page 883: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <EvalRange> Number of the evaluation range. Range: 1 to 10. In addition, 0 denotes the (non-configura- ble) "Full Span" evaluation range. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:STAT:DOM:USER? Query the default evaluation range. The response is zero, i.e. the evaluation range is equal to the complete sweep range CALC:STAT:DOM:USER 1 CALC:STAT:DOM:USER:STARt 1GHZ;...

  • Page 884: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user:show

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak" results, and the "Mean/Std Dev" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 885: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rdomain:user

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 341 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue> Defines the compression value x for the compression point measurement for phase formatted traces. to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? compression results.

  • Page 886: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rlevel

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off. *RST: Manual operation: "Ref. Range" on page 342 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt <Start> Defines the start value of the range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics: NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER.

  • Page 887: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rphase

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference RANGe – uses the average value in a configurable reference range as the reference value (see CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER) *RST: FPOint Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 342 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep. For dB formatted traces, the compression value x is set via CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel, for phase formatted traces it is set via...
  • Page 888 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Level> Reference level *RST: 1 dB Default unit: dB Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 343 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation.

  • Page 889: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference For dB formatted traces, the reference level can be set using CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Phase> Reference phase *RST: 1° Default unit: deg Manual operation: "Defined Value"...

  • Page 890: Calculate:Statistics:rms[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference SLOPe - return the slope (difference) between two marker val- ues. FLATness - return the flatness of the trace between two marker positions. ALL - return all statistical values, observing the order used above.
  • Page 891 214) Use the actual a-waves, depending on the imbalance parame- ters *RST: Example: SOURce<Ch>:TDIF:IMBalance:AMPLitude:LPORt on page 1275 Options: R&S ZNA-K61 Manual operation: "Compensate Imbalance" on page 550 8.3.1.22 CALCulate:TDVSwr... CALCulate:TDVSwr[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables/disables time domain site VSWR measurements. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 892 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..............898 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus ...............898 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STOP ..............899 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:WINDow ...............899 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:COMPlex <Result> Converts S-parameters into converted (matched-circuit) Y-parameters or Z-parameters and vice versa, assuming that port no. i is terminated with Z so that the three parame- ter sets are equivalent and the following formulas apply: ...
  • Page 893 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Model> TWAVes | PWAVes TWAVes - travelling waves PWAVes - power waves *RST: TWAVes Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]PORT<PhyPt>:ZREFerence Manual operation: "Renormalization According to Theory of" on page 256 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] <TransformType> Selects the time domain transformation type. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 894 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace. CALC:TRAN:TIME:CENT 0; SPAN 5ns Set the center time to 0 ns and the time span to 5 ns. Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span"...
  • Page 895 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Set Harmonic Grid and Keep" on page 334 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam <DCValue> Defines the DC value for low pass transforms. The command is enabled only if the sweep points are on a harmonic grid (to be set explicitly or using CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:TIME:LPASs).
  • Page 896 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - continuous extrapolation enabled OFF - continuous extrapolation disabled *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam Manual operation: "DC Value" on page 335 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate Extrapolates the measured trace towards f = 0 and overwrites the current DC value (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam).
  • Page 897 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Resolution Enh." on page 333 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:SPAN <Span> Defines the time span of the diagram in time domain. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Span> Time span of the diagram in time domain. Range: 2E-012 s to 200 s.
  • Page 898 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STATe <Boolean> Determines whether the time domain transformation for trace no. <Chn> is enabled. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON - time domain representation active. OFF - frequency domain representation active. *RST: Example: *RST;...
  • Page 899 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 409 Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME: DISTance), then the stop value is entered in m; the range and default value XAXis changes accordingly.
  • Page 900 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.1.24 CALCulate:TRANsform:VNETworks... The CALCulate:TRANsform:VNETworks... commands define the circuit models for single ended and balanced port (de-)embedding and activate the (de-)embedding function. The circuit models are referenced by means of predefined character data parameters. They are different for single ended and balanced port de-/embedding.
  • Page 901 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram CSSC Serial Cs, shunt C LSSL Serial Ls, shunt L SLCS Shunt L, serial Cs SCLS Shunt C, serial Ls SCCS Shunt C, serial Cs SLLS Shunt L, serial Ls STSG Serial Touchstone (.s2p) data, shunt C SGST...
  • Page 902 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram GSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSG Serial Ls, shunt C GSSG Serial Cs, shunt C SLGS Shunt L, serial Cs SGLS Shunt C, serial Ls SGGS Shunt C, serial Cs Table 8-6: Circuit models for single ended port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model...
  • Page 903 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Serial L, shunt L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial L Shunt C, serial C Shunt L, serial L SHLC Shunt L, shunt C User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─...
  • Page 904 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C Serial C, shunt C Shunt C, serial L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial C User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 905 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Table 8-7: Circuit models for ground loop port embedding/deembedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, no circuit model Shunt L Shunt C Shunt C Table 8-8: Circuit models for differential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram...
  • Page 906 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ...................910 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ..................911 PARameters:R<Cmp> ..912 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition ....912 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................913 C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................914 DATA<Port> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................915 G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................915 L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................916 R<Cmp> ..917 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition ....
  • Page 907 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................932 L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................932 R<1|2|3> .... 933 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:TNDefinition ....... 933 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] ....... 934 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine ....... 935 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................935 C<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................936 L<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................936 R<1|2|3> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: ......................937 G<1|2|3> ....938 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:TNDefinition ....
  • Page 908 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON - deembedding active OFF - deembedding inactive *RST: Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration. CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:DEEM:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for deembedding.
  • Page 909 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced: to select the adequate circuit model DEEMbedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition before executing this command. ● to load MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNA's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number <Port> Port assignment for two 2-port networks:...

  • Page 910: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:deembedding: Parameters:l

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block Data Format. Usage: Setting only CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp>...
  • Page 911 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1H to 1 H.

  • Page 912: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...

  • Page 913: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:embedding:Parameters

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - embedding active or inactive *RST: Example: *RST; SOUR:LPOR1 1,2; LPOR2 3,4 Define a balanced port configuration. CALC:TRAN:VNET:BAL:EMB:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for embedding.
  • Page 914 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load cir- MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt> cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNA's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number <Port>...
  • Page 915 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block Data Format. Usage: Setting only CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp>...
  • Page 916 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1H to 1 H.
  • Page 917 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...

  • Page 918: Parameters:c

    Defines a Differential Match Embedding network for a balanced port based on the given S-Parameter traces. MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt> load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNA's file system instead. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number of a balanced port Setting parameters: <Interchange>...

  • Page 919: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding: Parameters:g

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) <SParamTrcs> <block_data>...

  • Page 920: Parameters:r

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <CircuitModel> SHLC Currently only the "Shunt L, Shunt C" lumped element model is supported <Inductance> Range: -1 H to 1 H Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H Manual operation: "Network"...

  • Page 921: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:deembedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the deembedding function for ground loops. It is allowed to change the circuit model and its parameters while deembedding is enabled. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and...
  • Page 922 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SC | SG Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-7. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:C? SC Query the default capacitance for ground loop deembedding. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:C SC, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF.
  • Page 923 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform: is ON, then each port group can VNETworks:GLOop:GROup have its own de-/embedding models. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop deembedding. Range: -1 H to 1 H.

  • Page 924: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-7. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop deembedding. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R SC, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance for the Shunt C model to 2.2 kΩ.

  • Page 925: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding:Parameters:c

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - Embedding active OFF - Embedding inactive *RST: Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:TND SL Select the Shunt L circuit model for embedding. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SL, 2.2E+3; :CALC: TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB ON Increase the resistance for the Shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ and enable embedding.
  • Page 926 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G <CircuitModel>, <Conductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding<group>: PARameters:G? <CircuitModel> Specifies the conductance value G in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. <group> Port group (DUT) number. If multiple port groups are configured (see SOURce<Ch>: GROup<Grp>:PPORts) and CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:...
  • Page 927 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop embedding. Range: -1H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-7.

  • Page 928: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:group

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop embedding. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SC, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance for the Shunt C model to 2.2 kΩ. Manual operation: "Network"...

  • Page 929: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:delete

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:FSIMulator[:STATe] <Enable> De/activates the "Fixture Simulator" switch that allows to disable and (re-)enable the configured deembedding, embedding, balanced ports, and port impedance settings for the selected channel. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Enable> Manual operation: "Fixture Simulator"...

  • Page 930: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:Define

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 555 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>:DEFine <PP_First>,<PP_Second>,<PP_First>,... Creates one or more port pairs for port set deembedding. The command can be used repeatedly to extend or (partially) overwrite the list of port sets for deembedding. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:DEEMbedding<ListId>: on page 938 for general port set definition.
  • Page 931 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance Ci Range: -1 mF to 1 mF Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F) Default unit: F Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Circuit model whose capacitance C<i>...
  • Page 932 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:L<1|2|3>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 933: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <1|2|3> 1|2|3 Index i of the resistance R<i> in the related lumped circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. Parameters: <CircuitModel> STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS | GSSL | LSSG | SLGS | SGLS Circuit model whose resistance R<i>...

  • Page 934: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Define

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port set (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: DEFine) Parameters: <Boolean> OFF (0): Embedding inactive ON (1): Embedding active *RST: OFF (0) Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4). CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB1:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for the first port pair.

  • Page 935: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Delete

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 555 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete Deletes all port sets (including port pairs) previously defined for embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> This suffix is ignored Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] Usage: Event Manual operation: "Add / Delete"...

  • Page 936: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Parameters: R<1|2|3

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] Manual operation: "Network" on page 583 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: L<1|2|3> <arg0>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: L<1|2|3>? <arg0> Specifies the inductance value L<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 937: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Parameters: G<1|2|3

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference In the query form, the <Resistance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId> Index of the affected port pair (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine)

  • Page 938: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Tndefinition

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<i> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 pS (1E-12 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S) Parameters for setting and query: <arg0> STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Circuit model whose conductance G<i>...

  • Page 939: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:deembedding[:State]

    Defines an embedding network for a single-ended port based on the given S-Parame- ter traces. ● CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load cir- MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> cuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNA's file system. User Manual 1178.6462.02 ─ 12...
  • Page 940 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange> FPORts | IPORts | SGATes FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) <arg1>...
  • Page 941 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2? CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C cir- cuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2 CSC, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF. Manual operation: "Network"...
  • Page 942 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 943: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:embedding[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Cmp> Number of resistance in circuit model. The total number of resis- tances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ...

  • Page 944: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:embedding:Parameters: C

    CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: to select the adequate circuit model before executing this com- TNDefinition mand. ● to load circuit MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt> data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZNA's file system. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange>...
  • Page 945 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding. In the query form, the <Capacitance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 946 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <Cmp> Number of the conductance component in the circuit model. The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS. Increment: 1 pS (1E-12 S) *RST: Default unit: Siemens (SI unit symbol: S)
  • Page 947 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> CSL | LSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SLL | SHLC | GSL | LSG | SLG | Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 8-6.

  • Page 948: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:waves

    8.3.1.25 CALCulate:TTIMe:... Defines the properties and retrieves the results of the rise time measurement provided with the Extended Time Domain Analysis option R&S ZNA-K20. CALCulate<Chn>:TTIMe:DATA? [<Data>] Queries the results of the rise time measurement Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace...
  • Page 949 6 numeric values. Furthermore, the inter- pretation of the result values depends on the current trace's stimulus axis (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:XAXis). See the table below. Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Extended Info" on page 643 <Data> omitted <Data> = ALL Stimulus axis: <rise time>...
  • Page 950 <integer>: Lower rise time threshold as integer percentage *RST: T1_9: <UpperThreshold> Upper rise time threshold as integer percentage Options: R&S ZNA-K20 Manual operation: "Start Value / Stop Value" on page 643 8.3.2 CONFigure Commands The CONFigure... commands create and delete channels or traces and assign channel and trace names.

  • Page 951: Configure:channel:catalog

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :CONF:CHAN2:STAT ON; NAME 'New Channel' Create channel 2 and assign the channel name "New Channel". CONF:CHAN:CAT? Query all channels and their names. As a default channel no. 1 is created on *RST, the response is '1,Ch1,2,New_Channel'.
  • Page 952 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:MEASure[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables the sweep in channel no. <Ch>. This command can be used to restrict the measurement in a subset of channels in order to optimize the measurement speed. Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 953: Configure:channel:Trace:rename

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Query parameters: <ChannelName> Channel name, e.g. 'Channel 4'. Example: CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Table Area" on page 319 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:REName <TraceName> Assigns a (new) name to the active trace in channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 954: Configure:trace:window:trace

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? Returns the numbers and names of all traces in the current recall set. The response is a string containing a comma-separated list of trace numbers and names, see example below. If all traces have been deleted the response is an empty string (""). Tip: Use to query the traces in a par- CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:CATalog?

  • Page 955: Configure:trace:Channel:name

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow:TRACe? <TraceName> Returns the number of the diagram which the trace <TraceName> is assigned to. A zero is returned when the trace is not assigned/displayed. The diagram number is equal to the <Wnd> suffix in DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]: and similar commands;...

  • Page 956: Configure:trace:Name

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Trc> Trace number. This suffix is ignored; the trace is referenced by its name. Query parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Ch2Trc2'. Example: CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "New Channel" on page 512 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME <TraceName>...
  • Page 957 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <OldTraceName> String parameter with old trace name, e.g. 'Trc1' <NewTraceName> String parameter with new trace name, e.g. 'S11 Trace' *RST: Example: CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:REName Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Table Area" on page 319 8.3.3 CONTrol Commands The Control...
  • Page 958 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Tip: A simple application consists of selecting the channel numbers as parameters for CONTrol:AUXiliary:C[:DATA] and monitor the activity of up to 255 different chan- nels at the User Port connector; see example below. You can also use the User Port output signals as channel-dependent trigger signals for external devices.
  • Page 959 DESCription | TYPE | ACTivation | EXPiration | KEY You can query for an option's DESCription, its KEY and key TYPE, and its ACTivation and EXPiration date (if applicable). Example: DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? 'ZNA-K2',DESC On a R&S ZNA this returns 'Time Domain Analysis' (if installed). Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Software Option Info"...
  • Page 960 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference DIAGnostic:SERVice:RFPower <Boolean> Turns the internal source power at all ports and the power of all external generators on or off. This command is equivalent to OUTPut<Ch>[:STATe] Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - switch the power on or off. *RST: Example: DIAG:SERV:RFP OFF...
  • Page 961 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameter type Physical unit Power DBM, DB, DBW, W, MW, UW, NW, PW Voltage V, MV, UV, NV, PV, DBV, DBMV, DBUV Phase DEG, KDEG, MDEG, UDEG, NDEG, PDEG Group delay S, MS, US, NS, PS Impedance OHM, GOHM, MOHM, KOHM Admittance...
  • Page 962 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ..................978 DISPlay:CMAP:LIMit[:STATe] ..................978 DISPlay:CMAP:MARKer[:STATe] ..................979 DISPlay:CMAP<DispEl>:RGB ................980 DISPlay:CMAP:TRACe:COLor[:STATe] ...................981 DISPlay:CMAP:TRACe:RGB ......................982 DISPlay:LAYout ....................982 DISPlay:LAYout:APPLy ....................982 DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine ....................983 DISPlay:LAYout:EXECute .....................984 DISPlay:LAYout:GRID ..................... 984 DISPlay:LAYout:JOIN ................985 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:ACTion:CATalog? ..................985 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute ....................985 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:SELect ................986 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:TOOL:CATalog?
  • Page 963 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> 0 – Marker <Mk> of trace <TraceName> is displayed 1 – Marker <Mk> of trace <TraceName> is hidden Setting parameters: <TraceName> Name of the related trace. Manual operation: "Content Selection" on page 660 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 964 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram no. 2. DISP:WIND2:NAME 'S11 Test Diagram' Assign a name to the new diagram. DISP:CAT? Query all diagrams and their names. As a default diagram no. 1 is created upon *RST, the response is ''1,1,2,S11 Test Diagram'.
  • Page 965 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the zoomed diagram area Parameters: ON – activate the zoom window with overview window <Boolean> OFF – remove the overview window *RST: Example: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[: STATe] DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:NAME <Name> Defines a name for diagram area <Wnd>. The name appears in the list of diagram areas, to be queried by DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:CATalog?.
  • Page 966 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TITL:DATA 'S21 Test Diagram' Define a title for the default diagram area. The title is displayed below the top of the diagram area. DISP:WIND:TITL OFF; TITL:DATA? Hide the title. The title is no longer displayed but still defined so it can be displayed again.
  • Page 967 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:EFEed <TraceName> Assigns an existing trace (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>) to a diagram area <Wnd>, and displays the trace. Use DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]: to assign the trace to a diagram area using a numeric suffix TRACe<WndTr>:FEED (e.g. in order to use the DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet command).
  • Page 968 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 969 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference ON | OFF – display or hide traces. <Boolean> Example: *RST; :DISP:TRAC:SHOW? 'Trc1' Reset the analyzer, creating the default trace 'Trc1'. The trace is displayed; the query returns 1. CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON;...
  • Page 970 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Wnd> Number of an existing diagram area (defined by means of ON). This suffix is DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] ignored if the optional <TraceName> parameter is used. <WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of DISPlay[: WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED.
  • Page 971 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <UppEdge> Value and unit for the lower or upper diagram edge. Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see "Units for DISPlay... commands" on page 960. Default unit: NN <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).
  • Page 972 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows). Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S...
  • Page 973 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 974 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 975 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :DISP:WIND:TRAC:X:OFFS 1MHZ; :DISP:WIND: TRAC:Y:OFFS 10 Create the default trace and shift it horizontally by 1 MHz, verti- cally by 10 dB. DISP:WIND:TRAC:Y:OFFS? Query all response offset values. The response is 10,0,0,0. Manual operation: "Mag / Phase / Real / Imag "...
  • Page 976 These commands specify the start and stop values of the zoom window (left and right border), respectively. In contrast to manual control, all or part of the zoom window may be outside the original diagram. The range of possible values depends on the R&S ZNA's frequency range; see Chapter 8.3.14.12, "[SENSe:]FREQuency...", on page 1138.
  • Page 977 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <UppEdge> Lower or upper edge of the zoom window. Range and unit depend on the measured quantity, see "Units for DISPlay... com- mands" on page 960. Default unit: NN <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).

  • Page 978: Display:cmap:limit[:State]

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: DISPlay:CMAP:LIMit[:STATe] Manual operation: "Limit Test > Colorize Trace when Failed" on page 658 DISPlay:CMAP:LIMit:FSYMbol[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides the limit fail symbols (colored squares) on the trace. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - show or hide symbols. *RST: n/a (a *RST does not affect the setting).

  • Page 979: Display:cmap:Rgb

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - all markers have the same color, to be defined via DISPlay:CMAP<DispEl>:RGB <Red>, <Green>, <Blue>. The marker color is independent of the trace colors. OFF - each marker has the color of the associated trace. Example: DISPlay:CMAP<DispEl>:RGB Manual operation:...
  • Page 980 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: *RST; :DISP:CMAP:MARK ON; :CALC:MARK ON Create diagram area no. 1 (with default trace showing the S- parameter S ) and a marker M1. CALC:PAR:SDEF 'Trc2', 'S11' DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'TRC2' Create a trace named Trc2 and display the trace in diagram area no.
  • Page 981 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> OFF - independent color scheme in new diagram area. Moved traces change their color. ON - color scheme in new diagram area continues the previous color scheme. Moved traces keep their color. Example: *RST;...

  • Page 982: Display:layout:grid

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference <TraceStyle> SOLid | DASHed | DOTTed | DDOTted | DDDotted Optional trace style, only for traces (<DispEl> > 12): One of the string parameters SOLid | DASHed | DOTTed | DDOTted | DDDotted. <TraceWidth>...
  • Page 983 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Layouts are defined row by row (horizontal layouts) or column by column (vertical lay- outs). ● A horizontal layout consists of N rows, each of height h (i = 1 to N). The heights are defined in units relative to the total height of the screen, i.e.
  • Page 984 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference out. The <RepeatFormat> descriptors can be nested in order to describe joined layouts; refer to Creating Diagrams for an easy example. ● For a horizontal layout with N rows, each of height h (i = 1 ...

  • Page 985: Display:menu:key:action:catalog

    ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Setting parameters: <MainLayoutId> Integer value 1, 2 ... Current number of main layout, as defined by DISPlay: LAYout:DEFine. <DiagramNumber> Integer value 1, 2 ... Diagram number in the main layout <SubLayoutId> Integer value 1, 2 ... Current number of sub-layout, as defined by DISPlay: LAYout:DEFine.
  • Page 986 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note that no error is generated if a valid <MenuKey> is specified but the tab cannot be activated for any other reason. Setting parameters: <MenuKey> Identifier of a softtool tab *RST; DISP:MENU:KEY:SEL ':Meas:SParams' Example: Activates the "S-Params"...
  • Page 987 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Note: The format setting is only valid for commands and queries whose description states that the response is formatted as described by FORMat[:DATA]. In particular, it affects trace data transferred by means of the commands in the TRACe:... system. Parameters: <TransferFormat>...
  • Page 988 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference 8.3.7 HCOPy Commands The HCOPy... commands control the output of screen information to an external device. Part of the functionality of this system is included in the "File" menu......................988 HCOPy[:IMMediate] ...................... 988 HCOPy:DESTination .....................989 HCOPy:DEVice:LANGuage...
  • Page 989 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: MMEM:NAME 'C:\Screenshots\PLOT1.BMP' Define a printer file name (without creating the file), assuming that .BMP is the current file format (see HCOPy:DEVice: LANGuage). HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'; :HCOP Select 'Print to file' and create the printer file specified before. Manual operation: "To File..."...
  • Page 990 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - logo is included or excluded. *RST: n/a (*RST does not affect the printer configuration) Example: HCOP:ITEM:ALL Select the complete information to be printed. HCOP:ITEM:LOGO ON; :HCOP Include the logo in the printed output and start printing. HCOPy:ITEM:MLISt[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 991 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference DBACkground Dark background LBACkground Light background BWLStyles Black and white with white background and different line styles BWSolid Black and white with white background and black solid lines PBWLstyles Printer optimized black and white with different line styles PCLBackgrnd Printer optimized color scheme with light background ON | OFF...
  • Page 992 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt <RightMargin> Defines the distance between the right edge of the page and the right edge of the prin- ted information. Parameters: <RightMargin> Right margin Range: 0.01 mm to 10000 mm *RST: n/a (*RST does not affect the printer configuration) Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG:LEFT 10;...
  • Page 993 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference NONE - print no diagram at all. *RST: n/a (*RST does not affect the printer configuration) Example: HCOP:PAGE:WIND SING; :HCOP Select one diagram per page and start printing. 8.3.8 INITiate Commands The INITiate... commands control the initiation of the trigger system and define the scope of the triggered measurement.
  • Page 994 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Example: INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous Manual operation: "All Channels Continuous / All Channels on Hold" on page 437 INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate][:DUMMy] Starts a new single sweep sequence. This command is available in single sweep mode only (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). The data of the last sweep (or previous sweeps, see Chapter 9.2.4.3, "Retrieving the Results of Previous Sweeps",...
  • Page 995 ® Command Reference R&S SCPI Command Reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored in the "ZVR" and "ZVABT" compatibility modes (SYSTem:LANGuage 'ZVR' | 'ZVABT'). Parameters: <Boolean> ON - the analyzer measures continuously, repeating the current sweep. OFF - the measurement is stopped after the number of sweeps defined via [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:COUNt.
  • Page 996 Return the number of ports of your analyzer. Usage: Query only INSTrument:TPORt:COUNt? Returns the total number of test ports. Because the R&S ZNA doesn't support switch matrices, this is always the same as the number of analyzer ports (see INSTrument:PORT:COUNt?). Usage: Query only 8.3.10 MEMory The MEMory...
  • Page 997 Create a recall set named 'Set_2' and make it the active recall set. MEM:CAT? Query all recall sets. The response is 'Set1,SET_2'. MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\RecallSets\Set_2.znxml' MEM:DEL 'Set_2.znxml' Store the active recall set "Set_2" to a file, renaming it "Set_2.znxml". Close the setup. Usage:...
  • Page 998 Create a recall set named "SET_2" and make it the active recall set. MEM:SEL 'Set1' Activate the default recall set"Set1". MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\RecallSets\ Set1.znxml'; :MEM:DEL 'Set1.znxml' Store the active recall set"Set1" to a file, renaming it Set1.znxml. Close the recall set. 8.3.11 MMEMory Commands The MMEMory...
  • Page 999 The public and instrument folders can be used to store user data. To simplify this task, the public folder contains predefined subfolders; e.g. the subfolder C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\Calibration\Kits is intended for calibration kit data. The subfolder structure is similar to R&S ZVA/B instru- ments, however, the R&S ZVA/B default path C:\Rohde&Schwarz\Nwa is replaced...
  • Page 1000 Setting parameters: <Directory> String parameter to specify the directory. Example: MMEM:AKAL:FACTory:CONVersion 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ZNA\AKAL\Touchstone' Convert and copy the factory calibration data of the active cali- bration unit to the specified (writable) directory. Usage: Setting only MMEMory:AKAL:USER:CONVersion <Directory>[, <CalKitFile>] Converts an arbitrary (e.g.

This manual is also suitable for:

Zna26Zna431332.4500.221332.4500.241332.4500.421332.4500.44 ... Show all

Table of Contents

Save PDF